The Police State Road Map
Three Hundred Trillion Dollars and Counting
Chapter 1 MONEY
The Money Magicians
1.2 The Banking Cartel
Chapter 2 THE GREAT TRUST
The Military-Industrial Complex
2.2 Five Monopolies
2.3 Who Owns the Stock?
2.4 Who Owns the Media?
Chapter 3 THE GREAT TRUST AND WESTERN FOREIGN POLICY
International Relations Policy Groups
3.2 Tax Exempt Foundations and Charity Funding
3.3 The IMF and World Bank
3.4 Control over Western Governments
Chapter 4 COMMUNISM AND FASCISM
The Heart of the Issue: Power and Property Rights
4.2 Lessons From History
Chapter 5 LESSER DEVELOPED COUNTRIES
5.1 Empowering Third World Governments
5.2 The Sell Off
Chapter 6 PRIVATISATION IN THE WEST
Public Private Partnership
6.2 The Policy Comes from the Top
The Art of Killing Quietly
Chapter 7 THE ECONOMY
The Function of Poverty
7.2 Monetary and Fiscal Policy
7.3 Free Trade Agreements
7.4 Open Borders
7.5 The Environmental Movement
7.6 War as a Means of Planned Waste
7.7 Criminalizing Society
Chapter 8 THE NEW POLITICAL SYSTEM
The Future of Democracy
8.2 Banning Opposition to World Government
8.3 Creating Regional Governments
8.4 World Government or World War Three
Chapter 9 THE WAR ON TERROR
CIA/MI6/Mossad/ISI: The Global Terrorist Network
9.2 Proliferating Weapons of Mass Destruction
Chapter 10 MARTIAL LAW
Martial Law Legislation
10.2 Foreign Troops
10.3 Gun Confiscation
Chapter 11 THE LEGAL APPARATUS OF TOTALITARIANISM
11.2 UK Mental Health Laws
Abolition of Juries and Arbitrary Detention
11.4 Expanding the Definition of 'Terrorism'
11.5 Surveillance Legislation
11.6 The Ruling Class Above the Law
Chapter 12 THE TECHNOLOGICAL APPARATUS OF TOTALITARIANISM
12.1 ID Cards and Biometric Identification
12.2 Computer Databases
12.3 DNA Databases
12.4 Implantable Microchips
12.5 Radio Frequency Identification
12.6 Car and Mobile Phone Tracking
12.7 Surveillance Cameras
12.8 Black Budget Funding
Chapter 13 THE FAMILY
Elitism and the New Age Religion
13.2 Caught in the Act at Bohemian Grove
13.3 Targeting the Young
13.4 Banning Monotheism
13.5 Enforcing Love of Big Brother
13.6 Sexual Abuse
Chapter 14 POPULATION CONTROL
14.1 Funding Population Control
14.2 Aims and Methods
14.4 Public Health Policy and Western Medicine
14.7 Mind Control Technology
14.8 Junk Food
14.10 Germ Warfare
14.11 Depleted Uranium
14.12 Forced Abortion and Sterilization
14.13 GM Food
14.14 Weather Modification
The Western money monopoly is the central pillar of the New World Order monolith. The ownership and control of commercial activity by a few European and American families has created the necessary concentration of financial power to manipulate public policy at all levels through co-option of politicians, policy institutes, charities, educational establishments, and media outlets. Maintaining this international army is a very expensive business, so it is important to understand the source of its funds.
1.1 THE MONEY MAGICIANS
I am afraid that the ordinary citizen will not like to be told that the banks can and do create money... And they who control the credit of the nation direct the policy of Governments and hold in the hollow of their hands the destiny of the people
- Reginald McKenna speaking to stockholders as Chairman of the Board of Midland Bank in January 1924.(1)
G. Edward Griffin's book The Creature from Jekyll Island is the source for the following explanation(2) - a benchmark publication on the subject of banking and the New World Order.
Western banks create money through a fractional-reserve lending system. Central banks lend money to governments to make up for the deficit in taxation receipts. The banks print money out of nothing and receive interest bearing government bonds in return. These bonds are called "securities" because they are backed by the full credit and integrity of taxpayers who pay back the loans through taxation.
Eventually every pound or dollar borrowed passes through the current accounts and savings accounts operated by commercial banks. Under the rules of fractional-reserve banking, for the purpose of lending money, the commercial banker is allowed to print nine more pounds or dollars than he holds on deposit, or what ever ratio the central bank decides. He pays savers a modest rate of interest and charges borrowers a much higher rate on up to ten times the amount. His only costs are his buildings, employees, and book-keeping. The only risk he takes is an accounting risk if too many loans go into default at once. However, if he gets into serious trouble the central bank will come running to his aid with more money printed out of nothing.
Looking for the equity in this system is fruitless. Every penny and cent in circulation requires interest payment to the money powers because money is debt. Hundreds of billions of dollars world-wide are paid in interest every year to men who print money out of nothing.
A frequently asked question is, 'where does the money come from to pay the interest on the loan?' Quite simply there is none. Interest payments are serviced by payment in kind - through labour. This is a game of musical chairs where the money keeps on circulating between creditors and debtors. The profits from the banks are used by their shareholders to buy goods and services, passing the money to the workers to pay back the capital and the interest. If the game of musical chairs ever stopped there wouldn't be enough money in circulation to repay a penny or cent of interest. But the game is designed to go on forever.
Having said all this, the bankers are permanently and necessarily interposed between parties in the market place, allowing us to trade goods and services for money. But they charge a high price for their services, as many Third World nations have found out, and have become fantastically wealthy as a result. The problem of this money monopoly is as much a political one as an economic one.
1.2 THE BANKING CARTEL
The monopoly underlying all other monopolies is the banking cartel. The wealth of the Rothschild dynasty in the nineteenth century was legendary. In building the mightiest private bank the world has ever seen, the Rothschilds amassed the largest private fortune in the history of capitalism. Since 1919, the world gold price has been fixed daily at the office of N.M. Rothschild & Sons in London. However, before World War I the European and American money powers had already formed a lasting partnership. Potential competitors on Wall Street, which included European banking houses, decided that they could reduce competition from the provincial banks and achieve higher profits if only they had a functional central bank like those in Europe and cooperated in printing America's money.(4)
A central bank is a private cartel enforced by the police power of government. Created in 1913, the Federal Reserve 'System' was designed to benefit the most powerful New York banks, halting the loss of business to the hundreds of smaller banks in the southern and western states. The system appeared to distribute power equally between the twelve regional branches but in reality, it gave power to the New York branch controlled by The Money Trust on Wall Street.(5) The Jekyll Island Plan for the Federal Reserve Act was drawn up by the five biggest banking houses in Europe and America: Rothschild, Rockefeller, Morgan, Warburg and Kuhn Loeb.(6) It's chief architect was Paul Warburg of the German and Swiss banking house who moved to America only nine years earlier. He brought with him all the experience of European central banking. His brother Max Warburg was financial adviser to the Kaiser and later Director of Germany's central bank, The Reichsbank.(7) Paul Warburg's Wall Street banking operation was a partnership with the Rothschilds in Kuhn Loeb & Co..
After working together to create the 'Fed', the members of the cartel devised the acceptance market which powered up their newly created money printing press. Through the 1920s the acceptance market created over half of all the money printed by the Fed.(8)
Since then, the agents of the private commercial banks, who sit on the boards of the central banks throughout the world, have worked together to formulate international monetary policy. In 1966, Bill Clinton's mentor at Georgetown University, Professor Carroll Quigley, described the system in his book Tragedy and Hope: (9)
The substantive financial powers of the world were in the hands of these investment bankers... who remained largely behind the scenes in their own unincorporated private banks. These formed a system of international co-operation and national dominance which was more private, more powerful and more secret than that of their agents in the central banks... In addition to these pragmatic goals, the powers of financial capitalism had another far reaching aim, nothing less than to create a world system of financial control in private hands able to dominate the political system of each country and the economy of the world as a whole. This system was to be controlled in a feudalistic fashion by the central banks of the world acting in concert, by secret agreements arrived at infrequent private meetings and conferences. The apex of this system was to be the Bank for International Settlements in Basle, Switzerland, a private bank owned and controlled by the world's central banks which were themselves private corporations...
The international nature of the cartel was evidenced during the 1920s when the Governor of the New York Federal Reserve Bank, Benjamin Strong, worked with Montague Norman, the Governor of the Bank of England, to assist the economy of Great Britain at the expense of American investors. Increasing the U.S. money supply contributed to a massive speculative boom in the stock market and the Wall Street Crash in 1929.(10)
Woodrow Wilson was the U.S. President when the Fed was created. In his book The New Freedom he commented on the centralization of banking power:
Since I entered politics, I have chiefly had men's views confided to me privately. Some of the biggest men in the United States, in the field of commerce and manufacturing are afraid of somebody, afraid of something. They know that there is a power somewhere so organized, so subtle, so watchful, so interlocking, so complete, so pervasive that they had better not speak above their breath when they speak in condemnation of it.(11)
In July 2003 it was mentioned in the news that the Rothschild international investment banking group is controlled by a parent company called Rothschild Continuation Holdings A.G., located in Switzerland. Far from being competing factions, the English and French Rothschilds have worked out a deal merging control of their respective banking houses by forming a new holding company, Concordia B.V..(12)
It is these family run private banks which continue to coordinate central bank policy. On 28 June 1998, The Washington Post published an article about the Bank for International Settlements describing how "this economic cabal.... this secretive group... the financial powers who control the world's supply of money" shape the world's economy.(13)
The next chapter asks the question, 'who today really has all the money and where is it invested?'. This is not possible to answer with satisfactory precision but there are some good indicators that provide much food for thought.
Chapter 1 End Notes
1. Carroll Quigley, Tragedy and Hope: A History of the World in Our Time, The Macmillan Company, New York, 1966, p.325
2. G. Edward Griffin, The Creature from Jekyll Island, American Media, Fourth Edition, 2002,
3. Transcript of Jeremy Paxman's Newsnight
interview with Tony Blair,4th June 2001. BBC news on-line.
4. Ibid., p.437
5. Ibid., p.473
6. Ibid., p.12
7. Ibid., p.18
8. Ibid., p.482
9. Quigley, op cit., pp. 324, 326-327
10. Griffin op cit., pp. 474-475
11. Globalization, Robert Gaylon Ross Sr. See http://www.4rie.com/index.html#Anchor-51540
Continuation Holdings AG: Restructuring,Clarinet News, 9 July 2003. See
13. Dr. Stanley Monteith, The Brotherhood of Darkness, Hearthstone Publishing, 2000, p.33. See http://www.radioliberty.com
THE GREAT TRUST
In 1888, Edward Bellamy wrote a book entitled Looking Backward: 2000-1887 in which he predicted the future exactly as it happened:
The nation... organized as the one great business corporation in which all other corporations were absorbed; it became the one capitalist in the place of all other capitalists... the final monopoly in which all previous and lesser monopolies were swallowed up... The epoch of trusts had ended in The Great Trust.(1)
2.1 THE MILITARY-INDUSTRIAL COMPLEX
The bankers have invested their vast fortunes in every branch of commerce, cementing monopolies with interlocking shareholdings and directorships. In John D. Rockefeller's immortal phrase "competition is a sin."
The establishment of the European-American petrochemical cartel was achieved in 1929 with the marriage of I.G. Farben of Germany to I.C.I. and Shell Oil of Great Britain, and to Standard Oil and DuPont of America.(2) The cartel was formed after I.G. Farben discovered how to make petroleum out of coal. I.G. agreed not to enter the petroleum market so long as Standard Oil did not enter the chemical industry unless as a partner with Farben. By the beginning of WWII, Farben had become the largest industrial enterprise in Europe, the largest chemical company in the world, and part of the most powerful cartel in history. Besides the afore-mentioned companies, it had cartel agreements with 2000 companies around the world including Ford Motor Co, Alcoa, General Motors, Texaco, Proctor and Gamble, and virtually every enterprise that involved chemicals.
Hermann Schmitz, president of Bayer A.G and I.G. Farben during WWII, who also largely directed the Deutsche Bank, held a substantial amount of stock in Standard Oil of New Jersey.(3) G. Edward Griffin's investigation into the cancer industry found that the cartel agreement signed between Standard Oil and Farben on 9 November 1929 involved the exchange of some of Farben's patent rights over the coal-hydrogenation process for $30,000,000 of Standard's stock. The Rockefeller group concealed its Farben holdings in false fronts and dummy accounts and when Farben's vast holdings were finally sold in 1962, the Rockefellers were the dominant force in carrying out the transaction.(4) Paul Warburg, another founding member of the Wall St. banking cartel, was also a director of several Farben subsidiaries.(5)
A cartel is a grouping of companies that are bound together by contracts or agreements designed to promote inter-company cooperation and thereby reduce competition between them. Some of these agreements may deal with harmless subjects such as industry standards and nomenclature. But most of them involve the exchange of patent rights, the dividing of regional markets, the setting of prices, and agreements not to enter into product competition within specific categories.(6) In 1937, Fortune magazine editorialized:
By and large, the chemical industry has regulated itself in a manner that would please even a Soviet Commissar... The industry...is... the practitioner of one definite sort of planned economy.
In 1973, the United States Tariff Commission observed:
In the largest and most sophisticated multinational corporations, planning and subsequent monitoring of plan fulfillment have reached a scope and level of detail that, ironically, resemble more than superficially the national planning procedures of Communist countries.
Far from the money powers fighting for free-markets and against government regulation, the exact opposite is true. Giant cartels use government regulation and anti-trust laws to break up smaller cartels or to prevent competitors entering into the market. The ultimate objective is a feudal 'comand and control' society in which the corporations use government to diminish our freedoms.
2.2 FIVE MONOPOLIES
Corpororate monopolies over water, food, energy, medicine, and information, are just some manifestations of The Great Trust today.
The explosive growth of three private water utility companies in the last 10 years raises fears that mankind may be losing control of its most vital resource to a handful of monopolistic corporations. In Europe and North America, analysts predict that within the next 15 years these companies will control 65 percent to 75 percent of what are now public waterworks. The companies have worked closely with the World Bank and other international financial institutions to gain a foothold on every continent. A yearlong investigation by the International Consortium of Investigative Journalists (ICIJ), a project of the Center for Public Integrity,(7) found that world's three largest water companies - France's Suez and Vivendi Environnement, and British-based Thames Water owned by Germany's RWE AG - have expanded into every region of the world since 1990. Three other companies, Saur of France, and United Utilities of England working in conjunction with Bechtel of the United States, have also successfully secured major international drinking water contracts. But their size pales in comparison to that of the big three. The water companies are chasing a business with potential annual revenue estimated at anywhere from $400 billion to $3 trillion.(8)
In 2002, the American retailer Wal-Mart was the biggest company in the world, with turnover of $219 billion ahead of Exxon at $191 billion and General Motors at $177 billion. Five retailers- Wal-Mart, Safeway, Kroger, Albertson's and Ahold- take 33% of American grocery sales.(9) In the U.K. there is even more consolidation: 60-75% of groceries are purchased in the top 5 supermarkets.(10)
The oil industry is dominated by five companies: ( In order of size) ExxonMobil, Royal Dutch-Shell, British Petroleum-Amoco, Chevron-Texaco, and TotalFinaElf. Interestingly the recent Exxon -Mobil merger reunited the two biggest chunks of John D. Rockefeller's Standard Oil monopoly dismantled by the U.S. government 90 years ago. Mobil was Standard Oil of New York and Exxon was Standard Oil of New Jersey. (11)(12)
The world's drug industry is dominated by 10 companies whose total market value at the time of writing exceeded (U.S.) $ 1.1 trillion.(13)
Rank in (U.S.) $ billion:
Johnson and Johnson $161
Roche $ 72
Eli Lilly $ 67
In 1985, there were 50 substantial media conglomerates in the U.S. By Year 2000 there were six: AOL Time Warner, The Walt Disney Company, Bertelsmann A. G, Viacom, Newscorporation, and Vivendi Universal. Vivendi Universal is the parent company of Vivendi Environment, the water conglomerate. Recently legal rulings in Europe clearly indicate that there is more trans-Atlantic consolidation to come. The London Financial Times reported on 21 July 03:
The passage into law of the Communications Bill closes a turbulent chapter in the history of UK media...allowed the lifting of the bar on investments in ITV or Channel Five by non-European interests, the largest of which are US media conglomerates... the bill is, by international standards, extremely liberal on ownership but highly structured for content regulation, to be applied by Ofcom, the new media regulator. (14)
This followed a European Court of Justice ruling in favour of mergers and acquisitions. On 4 June 2002, the BBC reported that the European Court of Justice (ECJ) ruled that restrictions by some European governments on foreign ownership of privatized companies are illegal. The decision makes it more difficult for governments to block foreign investment in former state-owned firms on national interest grounds, paving the way for more cross-border takeovers and mergers. The decision has also boosted a planned overhaul of E.U. takeover law aimed at making it easier for firms to launch cross-border mergers and acquisitions. The reform is an important element of E.U. plans to create a single European market for investment services by 2005.(15)
2.3 WHO OWNS THE STOCK?
A recent article in the London Financial Times indicates why it is impossible to gain an accurate estimate of the wealth of the trillionaire banking elite. Discussing the sale of Evelyn Rothschild's stake in Rothschild Continuation Holdings, it states:
..[this] requires agreement on the valuation of privately held assets whose value has never been tested in a public market. Most of these assets are held in a complex network of tax-efficient structures around the world. (16)
Queen Elizabeth II's shareholdings remain hidden behind Bank of England Nominee accounts. The Guardian newspaper reported in May 2002
... the reason for the wild variations in valuations of her private wealth can be pinned on the secrecy over her portfolio of share investments. This is because her subjects have no way of knowing through a public register of interests where she, as their head of state, chooses to invest her money. Unlike the members of the Commons and now the Lords, the Queen does not have to annually declare her interests and as a result her subjects cannot question her or know about potential conflicts of interests... In fact, the Queen even has an extra mechanism to ensure that her investments remain secret - a nominee company called the Bank of England Nominees. It has been available for decades to all the world's current heads of state to allow them anonymity when buying shares. Therefore, when a company publishes a share register and the Bank of England Nominees is listed, it is not possible to gauge whether the Queen, President Bush or even Saddam Hussein is the true shareholder. (17)
By this method, the trillionaire masters of the universe remain hidden whilst Forbes magazine poses lower ranking billionaires like Bill Gates and Warren Buffett as the richest men in the world. Retired management consultant Gaylon Ross Sr, author of Who's Who of the Global Elite, has been tipped from a private source that the combined wealth of the Rockefeller family in 1998 was approximately (U.S.) $11 trillion and the Rothschilds (U.S.) $100 trillion.(18) However something of an insider's knowledge of the hidden wealth of the elite is contained in the article, Will the Dollar and America Fall Down on August 19?.." on page1 of the 12th July 2001 issue of Russian newspaper, Pravda(19). The newspaper interviewed Tatyana Koryagina, a senior research fellow in the Institute of Macroeconomic Researches subordinated to the Russian Ministry of Economic Development (Minekonom), on the subject of a recent conference concerning the fate of the U.S. economy:
Koryagina: The known history of civilization is merely the visible part of the iceberg. There is a shadow economy, shadow politics and also a shadow history, known to conspirologists. There are [unseen] forces acting in the world, unstoppable for [most powerful] countries and even continents.
Pravda: Just these forces intend to smash America on August 19?
Koryagina: There are international "super-state" and "super-government" groups. In accordance with tradition, the mystical and religious components play extremely important roles in human history. One must take into account the shadow economy, shadow politics and the religious component, while predicting the development of the present financial situation.
Pravda: Still, I don't understand what could be done to this giant country [the U.S.], whose budget is calculated in the trillions of dollars.
Koryagina: It is possible to do anything to the U.S... whose total debt has reached $26 trillion. Generally, the Western economy is at the boiling point now. Shadow financial activities of $300 trillion are hanging over the planet. At any moment, they could fall on any stock exchange and cause panic and crash. The recent crisis in Southeast Asia, which touched Russia, was a rehearsal.
This is a startling revelation: $300 trillion of wealth is secretly controlled by an unspecified cabal of the world's richest families.
The power of Rothschild family was evidenced on 24th September 2002 when a helicopter touched down on the lawn of Waddedson Manor, their ancestral home in Buckinghamshire, England. Out of the helicopter strode Warren Buffet, - touted as the second richest man in the world - and Arnold Schwarzenegger, candidate for the Governorship of California. They'd come to rub shoulders with James Wolfensohn, President of the World Bank and Nicky Oppenheimer, Chairman of De Beers at a two day conference hosted by Jacob Rothschild. Arnold went on to secure the governorship of one of the biggest economies on the planet a year later. The fact that he was initiated into the ruling class in the Rothschilds' English country manor is more evidence of the international nature of the cartel and the location of its centre of gravity. (20)
2.4 WHO OWNS THE MEDIA?
The New World Order would be in serious trouble, if for one day, the mainstream media put the pieces together and told the whole truth, 'the story behind the story'. Editing certain news out of the press has been just as important as putting propaganda in, probably more so. Westerners receive relatively little news about the atrocities committed in the socialist dictatorships especially in the former Soviet Union and communist China which continue to this day. The last thing they want the public to hear on the evening news is the fact that its our money which has kept these regimes afloat, or to find out who helped them into power.
In 1917 Congressman Oscar Callaway told the House that, in 1915 JP Morgan interests and their subsidiary organizations purchased the editorial policies of the 25 most important newspapers in the U.S. By controlling the policy of the most important, they were able to control the general policy of the whole media. They used this power to turn public opinion in favour of entering the First World War.(21) The Rockefellers took over the Morgan empire, and in the 1950s they had one of their pharmaceutical company directors and publisher of the New York Times, Arthur Hays Sulzberger, appointed as Director of the Associated Press. They also owned the trend setting magazines Time, Life, Fortune, and Newsweek.(22) Laurance Rockefeller was a director of The Reader's Digest, a barometer of orthodox thinking, especially on the medical issues in which his family had enormous financial interests. (23)
Forbes Magazine's recent bio' of media tycoon, Conrad Black read:
67% ownership in Ravelston Corp., a privately held company, gives him control of a 78% stake in Hollinger Inc., a publicly traded Canadian holding company with real estate and other investments. Hollinger, in turn, owns 32%of the equity and 73% of he voting control of Hollinger International, the Big Board media company that owns the newspapers. There is also a hefty dose of debt financing in this chain. Thus does Black, with a mere $13 million of his own equity money in the till, control $2 billion in media assets. The assets are impressive: Black's 129 newspapers include the Chicago Sun-Times, the fifth-largest paper in the U.S.; the Jerusalem Post, with a circulation of 110,000; and the London Daily Telegraph, which has 40% of the market for national broadsheet newspapers in the U.K...Directors include such illuminati as Henry Kissinger; former Illinois Governor James R. Thompson; financier Henry Kravis' wife, Marie-Josée Kravis; former ambassador to Germany Richard Burt; and Richard Perle, the controversial member of the Defense Policy Board." (24)
Forbes ranks two media billionaires, Silvio Berlusconi and Rupert Murdoch, at numbers 3 and 4 in the world in terms of power and influence even though their wealth is ranked 45 and 54 respectively. Italy's Prime Minister owes much of his influence to Fininvest, his investment firm that owns 49% of Mediaset, Italy's largest television network. He also has interests in banking, insurance and publishing.(25) Murdoch's media empire includes NewsCorporation and its U.K. subsidiary News International, British Sky Broadcasting Group, Sky Global Networks Inc. and Fox Entertainment Group. Besides T.V. networks and newspapers, this group also owns the publisher HarperCollins.(26)(27)
Two sisters Anne and Barbara Cox own 98% of Cox Enterprises which controls 17 daily newspapers (including flagship Atlanta Journal-Constitution), 15 TV stations, 78 radio stations and cable systems (6.5 million users). Their personal wealth is estimated to be $11billion each.(28)Two thirds of Viacom's voting stock is controlled by Sumner Redstone whose personal wealth is estimated at $9.7 billion.(29)Viacom now owns CBS, Infinity Broadcasting, Paramount, Nickelodeon, MTV, and Blockbuster. In 1980 Ted Turner launched America's first 24 hr. cable news service, CNN. Turner Broadcasting Systems was bought by Time Warner in 1996 but Turner remains Time Warner's largest individual shareholder (only 1% at June 2003) and sits on its board.(30)
Sir Evelyn de Rothschild used to sit on the board of The Daily Telegraph (31) and Edouard de Rothschild bought the controlling stake in French left-wing newspaper, Liberation, in December 2004. (32)
From July 1999 to March 2002, The Carlyle Group, an $18 billion private equity firm, held a 40% stake in the French daily Le Figaro. Carlyle Group investors have included Frank Carlucci, former U.S. Defense Secretary and Deputy Director of the CIA; the Bin Laden family; and former heads of state, George Bush Sr. and John Major. In March 2004, Le Figaro was purchased by Serge Dassault, head of Dassault Aviation a major military contractor.(33)
However, ownership, directorship and censorship is not the whole story of media manipulation. Much of what appears in the press is shaped by the education of journalists and their sources. The roots of the 'psychological operation' are in the schools, universities, charities, think-tanks and policy institutes - the subject of the next chapter.
Chapter 2 End Notes
1. Dr. Stanley Monteith, The Brotherhood of Darkness, Hearthstone Publishing, 2000, p.15
2. G. Edward Griffin, World Without Cancer: The Story of Vitamin B17, American Media, second edition 1997, p.183
3. Manning P, Martin Bormann:
Nazi in Exile. Secaucus, NJ: Lyle Stuart, 1981, pp. 29, 56, 69, 116-17;
134-35. see article by Dr Leonard Horowitz at
4. G. Edward Griffin, op cit.,p.236
5. G. Edward Griffin, The Creature from Jekyll Island, American Media, Fourth Edition, 2002, p.482 and Antony C. Sutton, Wall Street and the Rise of Hitler, CSG and Associates, 1976 p.164
6. Griffin, World Without Cancer, pp.187-189
7. International Consortium of Investigative Journalists (ICIJ),The Water Barons, a report for The Center for Public Integrity, 2003. See http://www.icij.org/water/default.aspx
8. Bill Marsden, Cholera and The Age of The Water Barons, The Center for Public Integrity, 2003. See http://www.icij.org/water/report.aspx?sid=ch&rid=44&aid=44
9. Impact of Wal-Mart on Retail
Consolidation and Standardization, Infosys Technologies Ltd.
10. What's Wrong With
11. James A. Paul, Iraq: the Struggle for Oil , Global Policy Forum, August, 2002 (revised December, 2002). See http://www.globalpolicy.org/security/oil/2002/08jim.htm#4
12. Jobs slashed at new oil colossus, BBC news, London, 1 December 1998. See http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/business/the_company_file/222402.stm
13. The 2003 Global Scoreboard,
BusinessWeek Online, November 2003.
14. The United States of
Television, Global Policy Forum.
15. EU Court Boosts Foreign
Mergers, Global Policy Forum.
16. French Rothschild is set to take helm in London, Charles Pretzlik, Banking Editor, The Financial Times, London, 10 February 2003.
17. Horses, stamps, cars - and an
invisible portfolio, The Guardian, London, 30 May 2002. See
18. Robert Gaylon Ross Sr.
19. Dr. Alexandr Nemets, Expert: Russia Knew in Advance, Encouraged Citizens to Cash Out Dollars, Newsmax.com, 17 Sept. 2001. See http://www.newsmax.com/archives/articles/2001/9/16/103951.shtml
20. Arnold and Buffett's Loaded Elephant Gun? Buffett's Back with the Terminator!, Reuters
24 Sept. 2002 .
See copy at http://www.infowars.com/print/nwo/schwartz_roths.htm
21. Monteith, op cit., p.31
THE GREAT TRUST AND WESTERN FOREIGN POLICY
There exists behind closed doors, a high command of policy groups which feed the argument for political globalization. Policies are passed down the chain of command into the public arena by lavish patronage of public institutions and key politicians. In discrete pursuit of financial globalization, they have also advanced the view that the future of mankind is best served by a transfusion of wealth from the West to lesser developed countries in the form of foreign aid and bank loans. This chapter identifies the groups which constitute the Ministry of Truth for International Relations and the next three reveal how they have miraculously consolidated financial power in the hands of their members.
3.1 INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS POLICY GROUPS
THE ROUND TABLE GROUPS
In 1870, John Ruskin, professor of Fine Arts at Oxford University, inspired a student named Cecil Rhodes with the dream of uniting the English speaking world under a federal government. Rhodes went on to become one of the richest men in the world. Besides the Rhodes Scholarships which provided for American students to study at Oxford, Rhodes' legacy was the formation of a secret society which professor Quigley called 'the Milner group'.(1)
Lord Rothschild loaned £750,000 to assist Rhodes in creating De Beers in 1888. As well as being the largest shareholder in De Beers, Rothschild was also amongst the 'circle of initiates' in the Milner group.This clique of British aristocrats invented the Round Table movement aimed at fostering international government. Two important Round Table groups were set up after the end of World War I: The Royal Institute of International Affairs in London, also known as The Chatham House Study Group founded in 1919; and The Council on Foreign Relations in New York founded in 1921. The plans for these two groups were drawn up at the 1919 Paris Peace Conference. The RIIA was largely funded by the Astor family, The Rhodes Trust and certain British banks whilst the CFR was a front for JP Morgan &Co.(2)
The financial elite have dominated the Round Table movement ever since. Lord Waldorf Astor was Chairman of RIIA 1935-1949 (3) and David Rockefeller was CFR director 1949-1985, Chairman of the board 1970-1985 and vice president 1950-1970. Despite being over 80 years old he is still the honary chairman of the CFR International Advisory Board.(4) CFR members currently number around 4000 of the most influential people in the United States. All of the major American news anchors are members of the CFR including Dan Rather, Peter Jennings, Barbara Walters and Tom Brokaw.(5) Both the Royal Institute of International Affairs and the CFR have off the record meetings which observe the Chatham House Rule of secrecy. (6)
THE TRILATERAL COMMISSION
David Rockefeller founded another international relations policy making forum in 1973 called the Trilateral Commission. It is dedicated to fostering closer cooperation between North America, Europe and Japan.(7) Consisting of the top few hundred industrialists and policy makers, this semi-secretive organization is far more exclusive than the CFR.
Like Round Table and the Trilateral Commission, Bilderberg's purpose is to coordinate American and European foreign policy. The annual Bilderberg meeting of the top 120 European-American movers and shakers is the world's most secretive and exclusive foreign policy making forum. There are no published minutes and only recently have the meetings been mentioned in the mainstream press.(8) They normally take place a week or two before the publicized G8 inter-governmental conferences. Bilderberg was founded in 1954 by Prince Bernhard of the Netherlands, a card carrying member of the Nazi SS. Whilst membership appears to change year to year, David Rockefeller has been spotted several times over the last few years and Dutch Royalty are regular attendees. Kenneth Clarke, Tony Blair and Peter Mandelson are just some British Ministers who have attended Bilderberg in recent years.
On the 'official participants list' from Bilderberg published before the 2002 meeting in Chantilly Virginia, media personnel included: Kenneth Whyte, National Post (CDN), Tager Sidenfaden, Editor of Politiken (Germany); Andrea Mitchell, Foreign Affairs correspondent for NBC ; Charles Krauthammer, columnist Washington Post; Jim Hoagland, Associate Editor, Washington Post; Paul A Gitot, Wall Street Journal; Conrad Black, Chairman, Telegraph Group; Jean de Belot, Editor-in-Chief, Le Figaro (French).(9)
Bilderberg's control over the mainstream press is evidenced by the fact that on 20th July 1976, London Financial Times correspondent C. Gordon Tether was finally fired after several attempts to publish articles about Bilderberg in the Lombard Column (10)
TRUST ME, I'M A BILDERBERGER
Unlike Mr Tether, Financial Times columnist Martin Wolf has been a regular attendee of Bilderberg for years. Only this year did he publish the fact in the FT, writing an article on the conference in Versailles in May 2003. Since the meetings are strictly confidential, we can only assume that Mr Wolf 's suggestion of a rift in American and European foreign policy is the first ever official - and well timed - piece of Bilderberg propaganda.(11)
THE CLUB OF ROME
In addition to these secretive groups, the elite manage a high-level international think-tank on environmental issues- The Club of Rome. Its members are one hundred individuals, at present drawn from 52 countries and five continents.(12) It was founded in 1968 by Dr Aurelio Peccei on behalf of Fiat and Olivetti.(13) With a particular focus on environmental issues, the group is charged with finding internationalist solutions to the world's problems. Members have included top businessmen, notably Canada's environmentalism ambassador and multi-billionaire, Maurice Strong. Honary members include European royalty and presidents such as Mikhail Gorbachev, the Red who mysteriously turned Green.
3.2 TAX EXEMPT FOUNDATIONS AND CHARITY FUNDING
The high command launch their policies into the public arena on a wave of money that washes over schools, universities and charitable organizations. In the United States that wave has been directed at changing the bias of American education away from individualism towards socialism and internationalism.
The Ford Foundation was established in 1936 by Henry Ford of Ford Motor Company. In January 2002 its assets were valued at $13 billion and total grants since 1972 alone total $10.2 billion!(14) The major Rockefeller family foundations were established by John D. Rockefeller - the General Education Board in 1903 endowed with $129 million, and The Rockefeller Foundation in 1913 endowed with $50 million. Total grants to date by the Rockefeller Foundation are estimated at $ 2 billion.(15) The Rockefeller Brothers Fund was founded in 1940 and by January 2003 it had given away $574,466,677. RBF merged with The Charles E. Culpepper Foundation in July 1999.(16) The Carnegie Endowment Fund was established in 1910 with a $10 million endowment from Andrew Carnegie(17) and became a key partner of the Rockefeller and Ford foundations in pursuit of a single aim.
That aim became apparent to The Congressional Special Committee to Investigate Tax-exempt Foundations, known as the 'Reece Committee', set up in 1952. To their concern, the Committee discovered that the Rockefeller and Carnegie group of foundations exercised a very significant degree of control over American schools and universities. In 1954 Norman Dodd was the staff director of the committee. He recorded an interview with G. Edward Griffin shortly before he died in which he described how the Carnegie Endowment and the Rockefeller Foundation joined forces after the end of World War I to use the education system, and the teaching of American history in particular, to promote internationalism and collectivism. And when Rowan Gaither, President of the Ford Foundation, met with Mr Dodd he made an astonishing admission:
Mr. Dodd, all of us who have a hand in the making of policies here have had experience operating under directives, the substance of which is that we shall use our grant-making power so to alter life in the United States that it can be comfortably merged with the Soviet Union.(18)
3.3 THE IMF AND WORLD BANK
The establishment of the United Nations in 1945, only a year after the IMF and World Bank, is some evidence of the parity of political and financial globalization. Vladimir Bukovsky, possibly the most famous Soviet dissident after Alexander Solzhenitsyn, spent twelve years in Soviet prisons and psychiatric hospitals due to his opposition to communism. He gave his opinion on the U.N. in a recent interview:
It was meant to serve the "progressive causes", such as advancement of socialism, "national liberation", unilateral disarmament of the West, redistribution of wealth from the "rich North" to the "poor South" or just plain anti-Western propaganda. (19)
Whilst the U.N. has pursued that goal through international aid and inter-governmental agencies, its sister financial organizations have been the key drivers for international socialism and the first world financial empire. In September 1963, President Kennedy addressed the annual conference of the IMF/World Bank and described the intent behind the creation of these institutions:
Twenty years ago, when the architects of these institutions met to design an international banking structure, the economic life of the world was polarized in overwhelming, and even alarming measure on the United States... Sixty percent of the gold reserves of the world were here... There was a need for redistribution of the financial resources of the world.. And there was an equal need to organize a flow of capital to the impoverished countries of the world. All this has come about. It did not come about by chance but by conscious and deliberate and responsible planning.(20)
Under the Bretton Woods agreements, The World Bank was to make loans to under-developed countries and the IMF was to promote monetary cooperation between nations by maintaining fixed exchange rates between their currencies. Under the IMF quota system, the majority of the donated capital to the IMF comes from Western governments, especially the U.S.. In 1970, the IMF came up with the "SDR " scheme for increasing quota capital. Special Drawing Rights, which are merely government promises to pay, increase the quota by 25%.(21) The IMF now has reserves against which its sister organization the World Bank can obtain loans from western commercial banks for developing countries. These loans can be obtained at a very low rate of interest because western governments offer to bail out the World Bank with "callable capital" if it gets into trouble. The callable capital is about ten times as much as the quota capital. Over the last fifty years a torrent of Dollars, Pounds, Francs, Deutsche Marks and Yen gushed through the World Bank/IMF directly into the hands of foreign dictators and used to build the one system dictators knew how to build: Socialism and despotism.(22)
The following chapters show that what appeared here to be simple foreign investment, was actually laying down the gangplank for the captains of Western industry and finance to board the ship, loot it, and sail off into the sunset with most of the Third World's natural resources and industries. Financial globalization has been achieved through economic piracy masquerading as international credit.
3.4 CONTROL OVER WESTERN GOVERNMENT
Before the bankers could channel billions of dollars to foreign dictators and set up inter-governmental structures, they needed Western politicians who were amenable to their plan. By controlling policy-making groups, education and the media, the bankers have helped to make international socialism more politically acceptable than it otherwise would be. There have also been very significant instances where the financial elite have selected and sponsored witting servants for the top jobs in politics to further their globalist aims. For example, Rothschild agent Colonel Mandell House personally chose Woodrow Wilson - the most unlikely of all political candidates - and secured his nomination for President on the Democratic ticket in 1912. It was House who convinced the Morgan group, and others with power in politics and the media, to throw their support to Wilson, allowing him to win the election and become the 28th President of the United States. Under Wilson, the United States got itself a central bank - the Federal Reserve system - and entered into a World War. Col. House moved into the Whitehouse with the President for six years and remained his most important adviser. In his memoirs, President Wilson said,
Mr. House is my second personality. He is my independent self. His thoughts and mine are one.(23
More recently, representing the most powerful money families in Europe, Helmut Kohl was the spearhead for European monetary and political union during his sixteen year tenure as German Chancellor 1982-1998. Between 1959 and 1969 Helmut Kohl worked for the 'Verband der Chemischen Industrie' (Association of the Chemical Industry), the largest lobby organization of the chemical-pharmaceutical industry - the Rockefeller/I.G. Farben cartel.(24) These interests systematically promoted Helmut Kohl's political career in order to further their global expansion plans. Kohl's chancellorship ended in scandal when it was revealed that he had accepted millions of Deutsche Marks in bribes, the source of which he refused to disclose.(25)
On 19 September 2000, an article appeared in The Daily Telegraph by Ambrose Evans-Pritchard which pullled all this together in just a few paragraphs (26). It began:
DECLASSIFIED American government documents show that the US intelligence community ran a campaign in the Fifties and Sixties to build momentum for a united Europe. It funded and directed the European federalist movement.
The documents confirm suspicions voiced at the time that America was working aggressively behind the scenes to push Britain into a European state. One memorandum, dated July 26, 1950, gives instructions for a campaign to promote a fully fledged European parliament. It is signed by Gen William J Donovan, head of the American wartime Office of Strategic Services, precursor of the CIA.
The article went on to describe how the Rockefeller and Ford Foundations set up an organization called the American Committee for a United Europe in 1948 which was run by CIA chiefs on their behalf. The documents show that ACUE financed the European Movement, the most important federalist organization in the post-war years. In 1958, for example, it provided 53.5 per cent of the movement's funds. Furthermore, the European Youth Campaign, an arm of the European Movement, was wholly funded and controlled by Washington. The Belgian director, Baron Boel, received monthly payments into a special account. The leaders of the European Movement - Retinger, the visionary Robert Schuman and the former Belgian prime minister Paul-Henri Spaak - were all treated as hired hands by their American sponsors.
A memo from the European section, dated June 11, 1965, advises the vice-president of the European Economic Community, Robert Marjolin, to pursue monetary union by stealth.
It recommends suppressing debate until the point at which "adoption of such proposals would become virtually inescapable".
What the Telegraph article didn't mention was that all of the OSS-CIA-ACUE principals involved in the "European federalist movement" - Donovan, Smith, and Dulles - were also Council on Foreign Relations members (27)
More evidence of this nature was recently obtained from the secret archives of the Soviet Union. Prime Minister Yeltsin outlawed the Communist party in 1991 but when he was challenged in the courts, he needed evidence of its criminal past. He turned to Vladimir Bukovsky for assistance in finding the evidence in the secret archives of the Politburo. In 1992, Mr Bukovsky was granted access to the archives for half a year, and copied as many documents as he could using a portable scanner and computer. Even the very small proportion of documents copied revealed much that was embarrassing to both Western and Soviet leaders. Consequently, these archives - including the documents which Mr Bukovsky still has on his computer- have been classified again! His 44 page booklet entitled E.U.S.S.R., published in December 2004, reveal some truly astonishing facts about the collapse of the Soviet Union.(28)
By 1987, Gorbachev had decided that perestroika included the convergence of the U.S.S.R. and Europe into a "Common European Home". This idea was supported by Europe's social democrats whose political leaders went in secret to Moscow before the dissolution of the U.S.S.R. to confirm that the European Community would include most of the Soviet states. However, behind these political leaders were the financial elite, in particular the members of the Trilateral Commission. One of the Politburo documents records a meeting which took place on 18th January 1989 between Gorbachev and key members of the Trilateral Commission - Rockefeller, Kissinger, Nakasone and Giscard d'Estaing. They encouraged the Soviets to integrate into the world's economic and financial institutions (GATT, IMF) and also into the European Community. Giscard announced that there would be a European state within twenty years and asked Gorbachev which East European countries would be allowed to join. Kissinger then asked what the Soviets thought of the concept of 'Europe from the Atlantic to the Urals'.
On 19 July 1990, Jacques Delors, President of The European Commission visited Moscow and confirmed in secret that he wanted the Soviet Union to be part of the future European state. However three months before, his close friend and European co-chairman of the Trilateral Commission, Georges Berthoin had met with Gorbachev's European advisor, Vadim Zagladin. Berthoin was the ambassador who set out Delors' views ahead of time. One of the possiblities Delors asked him to discuss was whether the USA and Japan should also be integrated with Europe and the Soviet Union. This idea reflected the inter-continental membership of the Trilateral Commission.
As we near our final destination of one world government and the New World Order, it's very important to realize who planned the journey. Why have the richest and most powerful men in the world done everything possible to conceal what they have been doing? If we are on the road to utopia, why the need for secrecy?
Chapter 3 End Notes
1. Carroll Quigley, The Anglo
American Establishment, GSC and Associates,1981, ch's 3-5.
See also G Edward Griffin, The Future Is Calling (Part Two) p.5 at http://www.freedom-force.org/futurecalling2.pdf
2. Quigley op cit.,pp.5-7 and 190- 91; and Griffin, op cit., p.7
3. Quigley, op cit., p.184. See also
Spartacus Educational at
4. The Council on Foreign Relations
5. Griffin, op cit.
6. Royal Institute of International
http://www.riia.org/index.php?id=14 and CFR website
7. The Trilateral Commission website
8. Emma Jane Kirby, Elite Power
Brokers Secret Meeting, BBC, London, 15 May 2003. See
9. Official Bilderberg press release and participant list, Chantilly, Virginia, U.S.A., 30 May - 2 June 2002. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/bilderberg_2002.html
10. The Banned Articles of C. Gordon Tether, Goodhead News Press - Bicester - 1977 ISBN 0 905821 009. See http://www.bilderberg.org/bilder.htm#banned
11. Martin Wolf, A Partnership heading for a Destructive Separation, Financial Times, London, 21 May 2003. See http://www.bilderberg.org/2003.htm#worse
12. The Club of Rome website.
13. Donella H. Meadows and Dennis L. Meadows, The Limits To Growth, 1972 Potomac Books, pp.9-10
14. The Ford Foundation website.
15. The Rockefeller Foundation
16. The Rockefeller Brothers Fund
17. The Carnegie Endowment website.
18. The Hidden Agenda, An
interview with Norman Dodd conducted by G Edward Griffin. Transcript at
19. Jamie Glazov, A Conversation
With Vladimir Bukovsky, FrontPageMagazine.com, 30 May 2003. See
20. G. Edward Griffin, The Creature from Jekyll Island, American Media, Fourth Edition, 2002, pp.109-110
21. What is the International
Monetary Fund ?, IMF.
22. Griffin, op cit., pp.89-95.
23. G. Edward Griffin, The Future
is Calling, part 3.
24. Dr Matthias Rath, The
Pharmaceutical Business with Disease, The Dr Rath Health Foundation. See
25. allrefer.com, an on-line
26 Ambrose Evans-Pritchard, Euro- Federalists financed by U.S. Spy Chiefs, The Daily Telegraph, 19 Septemeber 2000. See http://www.telegraph.co.uk/
27. William F. Jasper, Global
Tyranny.. Bloc by Bloc, The New American, 9 April
28. Vladimir Bukovsky and Pavel Stroilov, EUSSR, Sovereignty Publications, December 2004. ISBN 0-9540231-1-0
COMMUNISM AND FASCISM
The bedrock of the New World Order is a global financial empire owned and controlled by Western bankers and industrialists. It has been laid down using a two pronged strategy. The first was to finance corrupt and socialist regimes in developing countries in order to stifle the growth of domestic free enterprise causing them to become dependent on Western industry and finance. The second was a form of international economic piracy, where the World Bank and IMF fired a broadside of debt at Third World economies, knocking out their engine of growth, and allowing the Western multinationals to climb aboard and plunder their national resources and natural industries.
The success of the strategy can be judged on the one hand by looking at progress towards free-market economies and property rights around the world, and the other, the extent to which developing countries are beholden to Western corporations. To reach a moral conclusion about it, one might also consider the impact of the strategy on human rights, because the cartel has financed communist and fascist regimes alike, with absolutely no qualms about the human cost.
The emblem which best represents it is the skull and cross-bones motif of Yales' famous secret society, The Order of Skull and Bones. Many members of the cartel have belonged to it including generations of the Bush family. This emblem is the universal symbol of both and piracy and lethality, thereby representing the economic poison swallowed by most Third World nations. The Order was founded in 1832 by William Russell whose family fortune was built upon the global trade in opium, a substance almost as addictive and destructive as the drip-feed of Western currency.
4.1 THE HEART OF THE ISSUE: POWER AND PROPERTY RIGHTS
There is a staggering correlation between private property rights and political freedoms. GNP per capita in the U.S. is above $20,000 but in former Eastern Bloc countries it averages between $730 and $5000.(1) Whilst governments of lesser developed countries have had access to an unlimited supply of money from abroad, private enterprise has been stifled because the citizens of these countries have been denied access to capital by politicians. Hernando de Soto's highly acclaimed book The Mystery of Capital(2) documents how much 'dead capital' exists in developing countries. This refers to private property which cannot be used as collateral to obtain loans or buy stock in another business because the owner has not been given adequate property rights by the state. De Soto concludes:
They have houses but not titles; crops but not deeds; businesses but not statutes of incorporation. It is the unavailability of these essential representations that explains why people who have adapted every other Western invention, from the paper clip to the nuclear reactor, have not been able to produce sufficient capital to make their domestic capitalism work.(3)
He estimates that nearly 5 billion people are legally and economically disenfranchised by their own governments. Very few property owners hold government-licenced titles outside of North America, Canada, Australia, Japan and Western Europe. The total value of this dead capital has been calculated to be 9.3 trillion dollars which is forty-six times as much as all the World Bank loans of the past three decades.
LESSONS FROM HISTORY
The Nazis were financed by German industries such as Krupp and I.G. Farben and their owners and directors held key positions in Hitler's government. However, German industry was itself partly financed by British and American bankers. Much of the capital for the expansion of I.G. Farben came from Wall Street, primarily Rockefeller's National City Bank; Dillon Read & Company, also a Rockefeller firm; Morgan's Equitable Trust Company; Harris Forbes & Company; and even the predominantly Jewish firm of Kuhn Loeb & Company. In 1928, Henry Ford merged his German assets with those of I.G. Farben.(4) 40% of Ford Motor A.G. of Germany was transferred to I.G. Farben and Edsel Ford joined the board of American I.G.. A decade later, in August 1938, Henry Ford received the Grand Cross of the German Eagle, a Nazi decoration for distinguished foreigners.(5) During the Allied bombing raids over Germany, the factories and offices of I.G. Farben were spared on instructions from the U.S. War Department.
Without the intervention of the German government, Round Table leaders and associated Wall Street financiers, the Bolshevik revolution would never have succeeded. The popular Kerensky revolution which over-threw the Tsar occurred in February 1917. It was relatively moderate in its policies and attempted to accommodate all revolutionary factions including the Bolsheviks who were the smallest minority. The second revolution in October 1917 was a coup d'etat by the Bolsheviks who had succeeded in recruiting sufficient military support with the financial backing of Round Table and Co.(6)
Prominent American financiers included J.P. Morgan controlled Guaranty Trust Company and William Boyce Thompson, a director of the Federal Reserve Bank of New York and leader of the Red Cross mission to Russia during the revolution.(7) British funding came from banker and founding member of Round Table, Lord Milner.(8)
When private property was outlawed after the revolution, foreign money and corporations were needed to prevent the economy and the communist regime from collapsing. It has remained that way ever since: A symbiosis of the two powers whereby Western financial support for Russia's ailing economy has been channeled into the pockets of the international bankers via the companies they control. With domestic capitalism outlawed, revolutionary Russia was right from the start a 'captured market' for the Western bankers. This model has been used in country after country throughout the world.
All the banks in Russia were nationalized after the revolution except the Petrograd branch of Rockefeller's National City Bank. In 1922 the first Soviet international bank, the Ruskombank, was created by a cartel of Tsarist, German, Swedish, American and British bankers. In exchange for Russian gold, a steady stream of large and lucrative (i.e. non-competitive) contracts were awarded to British and American businesses connected to Round Table.(9)
Russia's gold reserves were soon depleted therefore game could only continue with the support of the Western taxpayer. With the end of the U.S. Government's Lend-Lease programme after WWII, which transfused $11 billion in military aid to the Soviets, the bankers reverted to the core mechanism it has used to build foreign dictatorships: Bank loans. Western (mostly American) taxpayers have bailed out the Soviets with hundreds of billions of dollars. Before the Revolution, the Ukraine was the bread basket of Europe. Afterwards Russia could not produce enough food to feed itself and has relied on millions of tons of subsidized food imports from the West. As Lenin recognized, the capitalists would have to make the rope with which the communists could hang them.(10)
The Western military-industrial complex helped to build Eastern-Bloc heavy industry, from oil-drilling equipment to chemical processing plants, air-traffic radar systems, equipment to produce precision bearings, helicopter engines, laser technology, truck plants and nuclear power plants. The German company, Junkers Aircraft , literally created Soviet air power. Acknowledging this apparent contradiction between geo-politics and international business, Secretary of the Navy, John Lehman, addressed the graduating class at Annapolis in 1983:
Within weeks, many of you will be looking across just hundreds of feet of water at some of the most modern technology ever invented in America. Unfortunately, it is on Soviet ships.(11)
These facts demonstrate that the Cold War and post-Cold War era concepts are invalid in terms of economics. The same financial system has always operated. The change of communists to 'social democrats' after the fall of the Berlin Wall was simply a name change aimed at persuading the Western public to believe that the world is becoming more liberal and democratic. In fact, the bankers now own everything of significance in communist and capitalist countries alike. It is no coincidence that the purported demise of the Soviet Union began at the end of the 1980s to coincide with the admission of the Soviet Union into the World Bank/IMF club. According to the World Bank's website:
It was only after radical changes had been made in the country's policy in the late 1980s that the Soviet leadership began to show interest in establishing ties with the World Bank and the IMF. The meeting of the Group of Seven in London in 1991 resulted in the admission of the Soviet Union to these international organizations as an associate member.(12)
Rather than a change of policy, this was actually putting the same old policy into high gear. Senior oligarchs in the communist party and the KGB simply stole the country's oil and gas industries during the economic chaos of the 1990s. More of Russia's assets are now open to foreign buyers. Witness BP's recent deal to merge its Russian oil assets with TNK, a big private oil company jointly owned by billionaires Mikhail Fridman and Viktor Vekselberg. The BP deal gives the combined company an enterprise value of around $18 billion. Russia now has one of the largest number of billionaires in the world and possibly the highest billionaire-to-GDP ratio in the world according to Forbes Magazine.(13) At the same time Royal Dutch / Shell announced a $15 billion investment in Russian gas production and a gas pipeline to northern Europe.(14)
In his book Globalization and its Discontents former World Bank chief economist, Joseph Stiglitz, describes how the privatization programme in Russia led to a robber baron economy and a catastrophic decline in GDP. Surprisingly, Stiglitz views this as yet another sorry mistake by an ideologically motivated World Bank/IMF. By 1992 $50 billion in loans and aid from various western sources rained down on the former Soviet states only to disappear without trace. In 1998 a Group -of -Seven/ IMF meeting authorized a $22 billion bailout. In 1999 it was discovered $20 billion had been stolen by Russian officials.(15)
Amnesty International currently has a major campaign for basic human rights in Russia. Torture is still institutionalized, anyone, even a child, who is taken into police custody for questioning is at risk of torture and ill-treatment. Methods of police torture commonly reported include beatings, electric shocks, rape, the use of gas masks to induce near-suffocation, and tying detainees in painful positions. Up to a million men, women and children are in prisons and pre-trial detention centres in the Russian Federation, many are held in conditions that amount to cruel, inhuman and degrading treatment. Conditions are particularly harsh in the pre-trial detention centres owing to chronic overcrowding. Cells are filthy and pest-ridden, with poor lighting and ventilation, and contagious diseases are rife (over 100,000 inmates have tuberculosis). Tens of thousands of children in Russia are languishing behind bars. Children also suffer torture and ill treatment in pre-trial detention centres and prisons. Since coming to power, Vladamir Putin has recently strengthened the FSB, the old internal security arm of the KGB, inhibited free speech, pursued politically motivated persecution of businessmen and pursued a four year war of aggression in Chechnya involving substantial atrocities against civilians.(16)
The communist revolution in China was also backed by Wall Street. In 1946, The American Government imposed an arms embargo on the Nationalist Government when it was on the verge of defeating the communists. Congress voted to send millions of dollars of arms to the Chinese government but the aid was deliberately delayed for months. When it did arrive, the rifles didn't have any bolts in them and were useless.(17)
China joined the World Bank/IMF in 1980. By 1996, it was the largest recipient of World Bank loans. With Western dollars, China has purchased power-generating equipment, oil-field exploration, fleets of jumbo jets, steel mills, satellite communications systems and huge amounts of high-tech military hardware.(18) Three years ago, Bill Clinton authorized Donald Rumsfeld's company ABB Inc. to sell two light water nuclear reactors to North Korea.(19) Starting in 1996, Russian and Chinese military units began to purchase U.S. made super-computers for nuclear weapons research. These super-computers can run American nuclear bomb design software and codes with little or no modification. They are identical to the computers at U.S. weapons labs right down to the vendor support.(20)(21)
Despite the fact that China has substantial trade with the West, evidenced by all the consumables in our shops which are made in China, Amnesty International details human rights abuses on a massive scale:(22) The continued use of the death penalty during the ongoing "strike hard" campaign resulting in high numbers of executions, often after unfair or summary trials; the continued use of 'Re-education through Labour', a system which allows for the detention of millions of individuals every year without charge or trial in contravention of international human rights standards; the persistence of serious allegations of torture and ill-treatment within China's criminal justice system, including police stations; and increasing arrests and detentions of Internet users or so-called "cyber-dissidents" in violation of their fundamental rights to freedom of expression and information. Joseph Stiglitz states that China began its transition to a market economy in the late 1970s(23) but the one-child policy, first adumbrated by Deng Xiaoping in 1979, was in place nationwide by 1981. The 'technical policy on family planning', still in force today, requires IUDs for women of childbearing age with one child, sterilization for couples with two children (usually performed on the woman), and abortions for women pregnant without authorization. By the mid-eighties, according to Chinese government statistics, birth control surgeries-abortions, sterilizations, and IUD insertions-were averaging more than thirty million a year. Many, if not most, of these procedures were performed on women who submitted only under duress.(24)
The Western cartel has supported the bloodiest regimes in human history all in the cause of financial globalization and the New World Order. The next chapter shows that the same game has been played in developing countries throughout the world.
Chapter 4 End Notes
1. UC Atlas of Inequality.
1999 statistics of GNP per capita.
2. Hernando De Soto, The Mystery of Capital,(New York: Basic Books, 2000). See also the article by Dr Michael Coffman, Why Property Rights Matter on Discerning The Times website at http://www.discerningtoday.org/PropertyRights3.pdf
3. De Soto, op cit., p.6
4. G. Edward Griffin, The Creature from Jekyll Island, American Media, Fourth Edition, 2002, p.295
5. Anthony C. Sutton, Wall Street and the Rise of Hitler, GSG and Associates, 1976, p.93
6. Griffin,op cit., pp.285-6
7. Sutton, op cit., p.170
8. Griffin, op cit., p.274
9. Ibid p.292
10. Ibid pp.296-299
11. Ibid p.303
12. The World Bank Group in
Russia, The World Bank Group.
13. Paul Klebnikov, Out of Russia's ashes--treasure, Forbes Magazine, 17 March 2003. See http://www.forbes.com/global/2003/0317/074.html
14. Royal Dutch/Shell and BP expand to Russia, Chemical Newsflash, sponsored by BASF AG, 24 June 2003, http://www.chemicalnewsflash.de/en/news/010703/news2.htm
15. Griffin, op cit., pp.129-130
16. Amnesty International briefing on the human rights situation in the Russian Federation. See http://www.amnesty.org/russia/briefing.html
17. Dr. Stanley Monteith, The Brotherhood of Darkness, Hearthstone Publishing, 2000, p.20
18. Griffin, op cit., p.301
19. Randeep Ramesh,The two faces
of Rumsfeld, The Guardian, London, 9 May 2003. See
20. Charles Smith, Brokering our
own demise, WorldNetDaily, 30 November1999. See
21. Charles Smith, China and
covert nuclear commerce, WorldNetDaily, 11 May 1999. See
22. Amnesty International, People's
Republic of China: Continuing abuses under a new leadership - summary of human
rights concerns, 1 October 2003. See
23. Joeseph Stiglitz, Globalization and its Discontents, Penguin Books, 2002, pp.117-118
24. Steven W. Mosher, President Population Research Institute, China's One-Child Policy: Coercive from the Beginning. Testimony Submitted to the International Relations Committee of the U.S. House of Representatives for the Hearing on "Coercive Population Control in China: New Evidence of Forced Abortion and Forced Sterilization," 17 October 2001. See http://www.pop.org/main.cfm?EID=305
LESSER DEVELOPED COUNTRIES
5.1 EMPOWERING THIRD WORLD GOVERNMENTS
Mr Ian Smith, Prime Minister of Rhodesia 1964-1979, often said: "we were never beaten by our enemies - we were betrayed by our friends". The West essentially promised white leaders in South Africa that they would be allowed to continue practicing apartheid if they would stop arming Rhodesia in her war against communism. Between 1979 and 1980, Rhodesia fell into Marxist dictatorship under Mugabe and had its name changed to Zimbabwe.(1) The World Bank provided loans to Mugabe up until May 2000.(2) This is not an academic issue since millions face starvation because of Mugabe's Marxist policy of seizing the nation's farms. Ominously, Mugabe has turned to communist China to run farms in Zimbabwe.(3)
In the 1980s the world saw starving children in Ethiopia, but what they did not realize was that this was a planned famine. The Marxist regime of Mengistu Haile Mariam undertook nationalization of agriculture and massive population resettlement program modeled on Stalin and Mao's starvation programmes in the 1930s and 40s which killed millions. Meanwhile the World Bank continued to send Mengistu millions of dollars, much of it intended for the ministry of agriculture undertaking the resettlement programme.(4)(5) The Wall St. Journal recently reported on a study by the The Free Africa Foundation which concluded that,
In country after country in Africa, there has been no accountability in the use of World Bank loans... Billions in World Bank loans have been embezzled in Africa and rarely anyone is held accountable and prosecuted.(6)
It comes as no surprise then that by its own admission, the World Bank's purported policy of strengthening African free market economies by lending $50 billion for 'Structural Adjustment programs' and other projects over the past thirty years has been an abject failure. That's because their real purpose was the exact opposite: The destruction of the property rights and the creation of socialist dictatorships. What else could possibly have happened after handing over $50 billion to undemocratic governments with no accountability?
Given a political system that is based upon a patronage system and governments run by uniformed bandits, the commitment to reform is almost non-existent as genuine economic reform would be politically suicidal. The result is a 'reform charade,' where "reforming" governments take one step forward and three steps backward.(7)
The Bank's own reports in the 1980s revealed that it played a major role in nationalizing the development process throughout the Third World. Regarding these so-called harsh conditionalities imposed by the structural adjustment loans, a 1985 confidential bank report by leading development experts concluded that 'the SAL's seemingly hard and all-encompassing conditionality is largely illusory'. The bank and some proponents of foreign aid claim that a wave of privatization swept the Third World but actually 'privatization was almost all talk'. World Bank loans either go directly to the recipient government or must be guaranteed by the government. So, by inevitably increasing the politicization of Third World economies, World Bank aid was the economic tranquilizer dart which created a weaker domestic market for the foreign multinationals to feed on.(8)
By 1982 almost every Third World government was running behind on its payments and Latin America was no exception. Over the next seven years, multi-billion dollar bailout packages failed to stem the economic decline. That's because they were used to build cumbersome nationalized industries at the expense of the private sector. For example, the western banks funded large government run companies such as Petroleo Brasilerio S.A. in Brazil and Petroleus Mexicanos in Mexico. By 1990 these companies were failing miserably and dragging the rest of the economy down with them. Brazil was unable to produce enough petrol and Mexico became a food importer. Brazil is now controlled by the military and government run companies consume 65% of all industrial investment. Exactly the same process brought Argentina's economy to its knees. It had an expanding middle class until its government became the recipient of massive loans from the World Bank and U.S. commercial banks during the 1980s. By 1989 inflation averaged 5000% and thousands of corporate bankruptcies followed. Government figures showed that in 2002, about 100,000 people dropped out of the middle class each week to become the new poor. A country that only 10 years earlier had Latin America's highest standard of living was now on a level with Jamaica; half of Argentina's 37 million people lived below the poverty level. The Government had subsidy programmes for about 2 million malnourished Argentines, but millions more got nothing. Some subsisted by scavenging through garbage. (10) (11)
Furthermore the West has supplied physical weapons for military governments to spend their free money on. Britain is the world's second largest arms exporter after the U.S. with 20% market share.(12) A U.S. military training school, the School of the Americas, has trained many of the worst human rights violators and dictators in various Latin American countries, including Roberto D'Aubisson from El Salvador and Manuel Noriega of Panama.(13)
Joseph Stiglitz's discussion of the role of bankruptcy laws in the 1997 Asian financial crisis reveals how the IMF deliberately undermined domestic property rights. Here the bankers exploited the absence of the legal framework for implementing trusteeships when large numbers of firms were going bankrupt. The IMF encouraged the state to get involved in restructuring the companies, i.e. telling them how to run themselves instead of sorting out who really owns the firm. Countries such as Thailand followed their advice and languished whilst Korea and Malaysia ignored it and prospered.(14)
5.2 THE SELL OFF
By the end of the 1980s the banks had successfully empowered and corrupted Third World governments with billions in bank loans. Liberal democracy and the free market had been strangled. Now for the second play: The sell off. The directive for the sell off came from the World Bank and IMF at the end of the 1980s as shown by World Bank documents signed by James Wolfensen and leaked to a BBC investigative journalist, Greg Palast. The World Bank flew in their teams who dictated their plans, an average of 111 conditions in a pre-written document, to each nation's finance minister. If he refused he would be denied any further loans and the life blood which had sustained his government would be cut. These conditions included selling off the natural resources and national industries to foreign multinationals. In the case of Argentina, they required the nation to give up its gas water and oil to Vivendi, Repsol, Enron and a few other multinationals. In 1988 Jeb Bush made a call to an Argentine senator asking him to sell a gas pipeline to Enron at one fifth of its market value. In return, a percentage of the discount would be deposited in the senator's Swiss bank account. The process has been called 'briberization' rather than privatisation.(15)
The Water Barons report for the Center for Public Integrity deals in-depth with the sale of national water supplies. "Surgery without anesthesia," was how Menem described his policies in 1989 as he set out to make Argentina one of the world's leading models for privatisation . Faced with rampant inflation - caused by the banks and who were suddenly "reluctant" to make further loans - Menem won passage of the National Administrative Reform Law, which declared a state of economic emergency and gave him the power to privatize public utilities by decree. As a result World Bank money came flowing back to Argentina. On 18 Dec. 1990, the World Bank approved a loan (a bribe) of $300 million for "The new adjustment projects in Argentina". None applauded louder than Santiago Soldati, a businessman and close Menem ally who would end up as the lead Argentine partner in the privatisation of water. Soldati later sold his interest in the water company, making a tidy $100 million in the process. In 1993, the Government granted a 30-year concession to run the water system to Aguas Argentinas a consortium controlled by two French corporate giants, Compagnie Générale des Eaux (now Vivendi )and Lyonnaise des Eaux (now Suez). Soon after, the World Bank declared the Buenos Aires privatisation an overwhelming success, and made it a model for privatisation s of water that followed in the Philippines, Indonesia, Australia and South Africa.(16)
The investigation showed that the enormous expansion of these water companies could not have been possible without the World Bank and other international financial institutions, such as the IMF, the Inter-American Development Bank, the Asian Development and the European Bank for Reconstruction. In countries such as South Africa, Argentina, Philippines and Indonesia, the World Bank has been advising the leaders to 'commercialize' their utilities as part of an overall bank policy of privatisation and 'free-market' economics. (17)
The World Bank calculates that privatisation projects in developing countries in 2002 alone totaled (U.S) $24 billion.(18) Having become impatient with the sluggish pace of progress on this issue, the World Bank launched an internet toolkit for privatisation in developing countries, providing on-line advice on how to sell off highways, water, waste systems, ports, and telecoms industries!(19)
When making the case for such a grand conspiracy as this, it is helpful to call a whistleblower to the witness stand. Published in November 2004, the book entitled Confessions of an Economic Hit Man by John Perkins ( now a New York Times best seller) is a public confession by an insider about the real purpose of Western loans to developing countries. Working in a private consulting firm, Perkins was one of the 'economic hit men' who carried out the plan detailed in the World Bank documents. Perkins describes a classical conspiracy between government and big business. The U.S. National Security Agency recruited and trained the 'economic hit men' to carry out their duties through private consulting firms and other corporations. The beneficiaries of the conspiracy were the international bankers and shareholders in the multi-national corporations. Unable to repay the loans organized by the hit men, developing countries had to surrender their national resources to their Western creditors.
What an extraordinary scam: Destroy a country's domestic capitalism and free-markets, get it into massive debt and then with financial gun to its head, shake it down for everything it's got. It is even more extraordinary for the fact that, because this piracy is conducted in international waters, it isn't even illegal! One of the questions raised in the next chapter is whether or not these agents have been acting, to some degree, on Her Majesty's (secret) service.
Chapter 5 End Notes
1. Peter Hammond, Not Defeated
-Betrayed, Frontline Fellowship.
2. The Wall Street Journal,
Opinion, 5 August 2003 (Review & Outlook).
3. Andrew Meldrum, Mugabe hires China to farm seized land, The Guardian, London,13 February 2003. See http://www.guardian.co.uk/zimbabwe/article/0,2763,894421,00.html
4. James Bovard, The World Bank vs The World's Poor, Cato Policy Analysis 1987, pp.4-6. See http://www.cato.org/pubs/pas/pa092.html
5. G. Edward Griffin, The Creature from Jekyll Island, American Media, Fourth Edition, 2002, p.100
6. The Wall Street Journal, op cit.
7. The Failure of World Bank Programs in Africa, A Special Report by The Free Africa Foundation, March 2003. See summary at http://www.freeafrica.org/reports.html
8. Bovard, op cit.,
10. Griffin, op cit., ch's 5-6 especially pp.103-104 and 116
11. Daniel Santoro, The 'Aguas'
Tango: Cashing In On Buenos Aires' privatisation , The Water Barons. A
report for The Center for Public Integrity, 2003. See
12. Brian Wheeler, How big is the UK arms trade? BBC, London, 9 September, 2003. See http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/business/3084718.stm
13. Anup Shah, Globalissues.org, 30
14. Joseph Stiglitz, Globalization and its Discontents, Penguin Books, 2002, pp. 117-118
15. Greg Palast, The Best
Democracy Money Can Buy. Also see Greg Palast's website for discussions of
the book at
16. Daniel Santoro, op cit.
17.Bill Marsden, Cholera and The Age of The Water Barons, The Water Barons, A report for The Center for Public Integrity. See http://www.icij.org/water/report.aspx?sid=ch&rid=44&aid=44
18.Private Participatiion in
Infrastructure Project Database, The World Bank Group.
19. Toolkits, The World Bank Group. See http://rru.worldbank.org/Toolkits/
PRIVATISATION IN THE WEST
6.1 PUBLIC-PRIVATE PARTNERSHIP
In Britain, privatisation started under Margaret Thatcher at the beginning of the 1980s, before the World Bank imposed the same policy on lesser developed countries. Even now, the privatisation process is far from complete, but a report in The Guardian newspaper summarized when the family silver was sold:
Cable & Wireless: Oct 81, Amersham International: Feb 82, Britoil: Nov 82, Associated British Ports: Feb 83, Enterprise Oil: Feb 84, Jaguar: July 84, British Telecom: Nov 84, British Gas: Dec 86, British Airways: Feb 87, Rolls-Royce: May 87, BAA: July 87, British Steel: Dec 88, Regional water companies: Dec 89, Electricity distribution companies: Dec 90.(1)
At the same time, Margaret Thatcher introduced Compulsory Competitive Tendering (CCT) which started the sell off of national and local government. John Major renamed this Private Finance Initiative (PFI) in 1992, and the policy has continued unabated under Tony Blair.(2) The Public-Private Partnership (PPP) industry website boasts:
564 PFI deals with a capital value of more than £35bn have been signed.(3)...There has been wide coverage on the use of PPPs in health and education, but PPPs are being used in a diverse range of projects like helicopter simulators for the Ministry of Defence and the redevelopment of the main Treasury building... Chancellor Gordon Brown said in a recent speech that "there should be no principled objection to PFI expanding into new areas, such as the provision of employment and training services, the renovation of schools and colleges, major projects or urban regeneration and social housing.(4)
The most ironic PPP initiative is the 'Strategic Transfer of the Estate to The Private Sector ' (STEPS) by the Inland Revenue (IRS equivalent). In March 2001, it signed a Private Finance Initiative deal, selling off its entire estate for £220 million to Mapeley Steps Ltd. a company controlled by George Soros located in the off-shore tax haven of Bermuda.(5)
Britain has led the field in PPPs, but almost every government in the world has been implementing the PPP model.(6) Having firmly established themselves in Europe, Africa, Latin America and Asia, the water companies are expanding into the far more lucrative market of the United States. The U.S. still has publicly owned water but that looks set to change as the French and German multinationals are winning the battle in Congress to allow them to take over America's aging water infrastructure.(7)
6.2 THE POLICY COMES FROM THE TOP
Although the World Bank introduced privatisation to developing countries with strong arm tactics at the end of the 1980s, it now has an army of policy forums giving intellectual credibility to it. The Water Barons investigation reveals that the water companies have joined forces with the World Bank and the United Nations to create an array of international think tanks, advisory commissions, and forums that have dominated the water debate and established privatisation as the dominant solution to the world's water problems. "What we have seen during the 1990s has been the setting-up of a kind of global high command for water," wrote Ricardo Petrella, a leading researcher on the politics of water. The U.N. is now promoting PPP as a key component of the United Nations' programme for sustainable development.(8)
At the same time as the World Bank/ IMF imposed its privatisation policy on the Third World, Prince Charles launched his Prince of Wales Business Leaders Forum. Since 1990, when he conducted his first city conference in Charleston, North Carolina, he has amassed over 5,000 multinational and national corporations whom he works with in setting up public-private partnerships. This is a key institution in the globalization machine, hence its members include 65 of the world's biggest companies. As noted in chapter two, the multi-trillion dollar shareholdings of the British, European and American elite are hidden behind false fronts, trusts and Bank of England nominee accounts.(9)(10)
N. M. Rothschild & Sons has guided the privatisation process, especially in the U.K. Their website boasts:
1985 saw N. M.Rothschild & Sons win the 'beauty contest' to advise the British Government on the sale of British Gas. This was the most significant piece of privatisation work to be undertaken by N. M. Rothschild& Sons, pioneers in such business from 1971. Further advisory roles were taken with regard to the privatisation of British Steel and British Coal as well as the regional electricity and water boards. It would lead to business in over 40 countries worldwide.
... [ in 2000] the British Government appointed N M Rothschild & Sons as financial advisers for 3G mobile phone licensing. The bank adopted an innovative and highly successful auction process whereby telephone companies bid for the available licences, and was subsequently approached by other governments worldwide to undertake similar projects. (11)
Lord Wakeham was the Conservative Chief Whip from 1983 to 1987 and Secretary for Energy from 1989 to 1992. He authorized Enron to buy into the privatized water and electricity systems, and then, in 1994 when he resigned as leader of the House of Lords, he joined Enron as a non-executive director and sat on its audit committee. Lord Wakeham had also awarded a contract to N. M. Rothschild to advise the Government on coal privatisation. In 1995 he became a director of N. M. Rothschild.(12)
In November 2003, Oliver Letwin resigned his directorship of N. M. Rothschild, which he had held since 1991, to become Shadow Chancellor of the Exchequer for the Conservative party. He is author of the book 'Privatising the World' and has worked as an adviser to foreign governments on privatisation.(13)
Norman Lamont was the Tory Chancellor of the Exchequer from 1990-1993. After he graduated from university, he worked for N. M. Rothschild for eleven years and was a director of Rothschild Asset Management. After leaving government he became a director of N.M. Rothschild 1993-1995.(14)
Eddie George was Governor of the Bank of England from 1993-2003. After retirement, he joined the Rothschild group and sits on the board of Rothschild Continuation Holdings A.G., the Bank for International Settlements, Switzerland, and N. M. Rothschild . (15)
A Western money monopoly was well established by the beginning of the twentieth century but still remains hidden today. The money monopoly is dynastic and transcends national borders enabling the Anglo-European-American elite to transfer all the world's wealth into their hands and to create a global government under their control - a new Dark Age of global feudalism or global fascism. Since the late 1980s, the sale of the world's resources and industries to the international bankers has accelerated. Now all that remains is to strip Westerners of what remains of their property and the vision of John D. Rockefeller's General Education Board will be fulfilled:
In our dreams
we have limitless resources, and the people yield themselves with perfect
docility to our molding hands...
- Fred Gates, "Occasional Paper No.1", 1904, General Education Board
On the eve of the 2001 General Election, Prime Minister Tony Blair was interviewed by the BBC's leading news presenter, Jeremy Paxman. There was an extraordinary exchange over the question of whether or not someone can become too rich.(3) In describing the extent to which money really is power, the rest of this book explains one of the reasons why Tony Blair did not want to answer that question.
PAXMAN: Do you believe that an individual can earn too much money?
BLAIR: I don't really - it is not - no, it's not a view I have. Do you mean that we should cap someone's income? Not really, no. Why? What is the point? You can spend ages trying to stop the highest paid earners earning the money but in an international market like today, you probably would drive them abroad. What does that matter? Surely the important thing is to level up those people that don't have opportunity in our society.
PAXMAN: But where is the justice in taxing someone who earns £34,000 a year, which is about enough to cover a mortgage on a one-bedroom flat in outer London, at the same rate as someone who earns £34 million. Where is the justice?
BLAIR: The person who earns £34 million, if they're paying the top rate of tax, will pay far more tax on the £34 million than the person on £34,000.
PAXMAN: I am asking you about the rate of tax.
BLAIR: I know and what I am saying to you is the rate is less important in this instance than the overall amount of tax that people would pay. You know what would happen, if you go back to the days of high top rates of tax. All that would happen is that those people, who are small in number actually, and you can spend a lot of time getting after the person earning millions of pound a year, and then what you don't do is apply the real energy where it's necessary on things like the children's tax credit, the Working Families Tax Credit, the minimum wage, the New Deal, all the things that have helped people on lower incomes.
PAXMAN: But where is the justice in it?
BLAIR: When you say where is the justice in that, the justice for me is concentrated on lifting incomes of those that don't have a decent income. It's not a burning ambition for me to make sure that David Beckham earns less money.
PAXMAN: But Prime Minister, the gap between rich and poor has by widened while you have been in office.
BLAIR: A lot of those figures are based on a couple of years ago before many of the measures we took came into effect. But the lowest income families in this country are benefiting from the government. Their incomes are rising. The fact that you have some people at the top end earning more
PAXMAN: ..Benefiting more!
BLAIR: If they are earning more, fine, they pay their taxes.
PAXMAN: But is it acceptable for gap between rich and poor to widen?
BLAIR: It is acceptable for those people on lower incomes to have their incomes raised. It is unacceptable that they are not given the chances. To me, the key thing is not whether the gap between those who, between the person who earns the most in the country and the person that earns the least, whether that gap is.
PAXMAN: So it is acceptable for gap to widen between rich and poor?
BLAIR: It is not acceptable for poor people not to be given the chances they need in life.
PAXMAN: That is not my question.
BLAIR: I know it's not your question but it's the way I choose to answer it. If you end up going after those people who are the most wealthy in society, what you actually end up doing is in fact not even helping those at the bottom end.
PAXMAN: So the answer to the straight question is it acceptable for gap between rich and poor to get wider, the answer you are saying is yes.
BLAIR: No, it's not what I am saying. What I am saying is that my task is
PAXMAN: You are not saying no.
BLAIR: But I don't think that is the issue
PAXMAN: You may not think it is the issue, but it is the question. Is it OK for the gap to get wider?
BLAIR: It may be the question. The way I choose to answer it is to say the job of government is make sure that those at the bottom get the chances.
PAXMAN: With respect, people see you are asked a straightforward question and they see you not answering it.
BLAIR: Because I choose to answer it in the way that I'm answering it.
PAXMAN: But you are not answering it.
BLAIR: I am answering it. What I am saying is the most important thing is to level up, not level down.
PAXMAN: Is it acceptable for gap between rich and poor to get bigger?
BLAIR: What I am saying is the issue isn't in fact whether the very richest person ends up becoming richer. The issue is whether the poorest person is given the chance that they don't otherwise have.
PAXMAN: I understand what you are saying. The question is about the gap.
BLAIR: Yes, I know what your question is. I am choosing to answer it in my way rather than yours.
PAXMAN: But you're not answering it.
BLAIR: I am.
PAXMAN: You are answering another question.
BLAIR: I am answering actually in the way that I want to answer it. I tell you why I want to answer it in this way. Because if you end up saying no, actually my task is to stop the person earning a lot of money earning a lot of money, you waste all your time and energy, taking money off the people who are very wealthy when in today's world, they probably would move elsewhere and make their money. What you are not asking me about, which would be a more fruitful line of endeavour, is what are you doing for the poorest people to give them a boost.
PAXMAN: Let's talk about tax. You have promised...
BLAIR: Why don't we talk about the poorest of society and what we are doing for them.
PAXMAN: I assume you want to be Prime Minister. I just want to be an interviewer. Can we stick to that arrangement?
So, remembering the question put to Tony Blair of whether or not someone can become too rich, the second section of this book examines 'the art of killing quietly'.
Chapter 6 End Notes
1. Larry Elliott and Jill Treanor, A whole world sold on sell-offs, The Guardian, London, 22 Nov. 2000. See http://www.guardian.co.uk/Thatcher/Story/0,2763,401129,00.html
2. Timeline: outsourcing and the
public sector, The Guardian.
3. Chief Secretary to the Treasury, Rt Hon Paul Boateng MP, 11 June 2003, Completed Projects, PPP Forum website. See http://www.pppforum.com/completed.html
4. Frequently Asked Questions,
5. Stefan Armbruster, Revenue sell-off to tax haven firm, BBC, London, 23 Sept. 2002. See http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/low/business/2263208.stm
6. PPP websites: Canada http://www.pppcouncil.ca/index.asp
Netherlands http://www.pppcentre.com/ Ireland http://www.ppp.gov.ie/
7. Erika Hobbs, Low Rates, Needed
Repairs Lure 'Big Water' to Uncle Sam's Plumbing, The Water Barons,
a report for The Center for Public Integrity.
8. Public Private Partnership, United Nations Economic Commission for Europe website, Introduction. See http://www.unece.org/operact/ppp/introduction.htm
9. Joan M. Veon, synopsis of Prince
Charles the Sustainable Prince.
10. The International Business Leaders Forum website, members section. See http://www.pwblf.org/csr/csrwebassist.nsf/content/f1b2a3.html
11. N.M. Rothschild website,
12. Andrew Clark and David Hencke, Master
fixer who ended up in a fix, The Guardian, 30 January 2002
13. Oliver Letwin, Political
Profile, BBC News Online
14. Lord Lamont of Lerwick, Benador
15. Nestle, CorporateWatch
7.1 THE FUNCTION OF POVERTY
The standard of living of the average American
has to decline...
- Paul Volcker, Chairman of The Federal Reserve, New York Times, 18 October 1979, p.1, Volcker Asserts U.S Must Trim Living Standard.
'Money is power'. Well, to be precise, it's the gap between the rich and poor that counts. The objective of the elite is to maintain the capitalist structure as it is with one vital difference. There will be no middle class in the New World Order. Under public-private partnership, the middle class, free markets, and consumer choice will be replaced with a neo-feudal society in which the Money Trust dictates to an impoverished populace through a supranational technocracy. This is international socialism, run for the benefit of the financial elite who own the economy and control the emerging continental Politburos. The polite name for it is 'The Third Way', but less deferential commentators call it 'corporate fascism'. The corporations need government to restrict consumer choice in the market place, allowing the cartel to determine what we can buy, sell, or even do in our own homes. The 'Third Way' is the path to utopia for our self-appointed philosopher kings, advocated by the likes of Bill Clinton, Tony Blair, and Gerhard Schroder - their senior political puppets. There is no difference between ostensibly right and left wing political parties about the eventual destination, even if they appear to be travelling at different speeds towards it.
Real power, then, is achieved when the ruling class controls the material essentials of life, granting and withholding them as if they were privileges, as George Orwell reflected:
From the moment when the machine first made its appearance it was clear to all thinking people that the need for human drudgery, and therefore to a great extent for human inequality, had disappeared. If the machine were used deliberately for that end, hunger, overwork, dirt, illiteracy, and disease could be eliminated within a few generations But it was also clear that an all-around increase in wealth threatened the destruction... of a hierarchical society. In a world in which everyone worked short hours, had enough to eat, lived in a house with a bathroom and a refrigerator, and possessed a motorcar or even an airplane, the most obvious and perhaps the most important form of inequality would already have disappeared. If it once became general, wealth would confer no distinction. Such a society could not long remain stable. For if leisure and security were enjoyed by all alike, the great mass of human beings who are normally stupefied by poverty would become literate and would learn to think for themselves; and when once they had done this, they would sooner or later realize that the privileged minority had no function, and they would sweep it away. In the long run, a hierarchical society was only possible on a basis of poverty and ignorance... It is deliberate policy to keep even the favoured groups somewhere near the brink of hardship because a general state of scarcity increases the importance of small privileges and thus magnifies the distinction between one group and another... The social atmosphere is that of a besieged city, where the possession of a lump of horseflesh makes the difference between wealth and poverty.
The difference between riches and poverty is often the difference between pleasure and pain. Orwell concluded this idea in the torture episode at the end of 1984.
How does one man assert his power over another, Winston?' By making him suffer. Obedience is not enough. Unless he is suffering, how can you be sure that he is obeying your will and not his own? Power is in inflicting pain and humiliation... Progress in our world will be progress towards more pain.(1)
In The Creature from Jekyll Island, G. Edward Griffin discusses the relationship between 1984 and The Report From Iron Mountain: On the Possibility and Desirability of Peace by Leonard Lewin. It has never been established whether or not this report published in 1966 was written by a U.S. government think tank or if it was an elaborate political satire. On 26 November,1967, the report was reviewed in the book section of the Washington Post by Herschel McLandress, which was the pen name for Harvard professor John Kenneth Galbraith. Galbraith, who also had been a member of the Council on Foreign Relations, said that he knew firsthand of the report's authenticity because he had been invited to participate in it. Although he was unable to be part of the official group, he was consulted from time to time and had been asked to keep the project a secret. Furthermore, while he doubted the wisdom of letting the public know about the report, he agreed totally with its conclusions. For the purposes of Griffin's comparison, it makes no difference whether it is a satire. The report credits Orwell for many of its ideas and it is a blueprint for what has occurred since. Importantly, it agreed with Orwell's view that poverty is a prerequisite for a hierarchical society:
The continuance of the war system must be assured, if for no other reason, among others, than to preserve whatever quality and degree of poverty a society requires as an incentive, as well as to maintain the stability of its internal organization of power.
The economic destruction of the world's middle class is well advanced. Personal debt, bankruptcies, and unemployment are soaring while investments are destroyed in the stock-market and incomes decline. Like Manchurian Candidates, the Western middle class have played their essential part in creating the techno-bureaucracy of the new feudalism which will enslave them. This chapter describes seven significant methods being used to reduce living standards around the world. These are: 1. money supply and taxation; 2. free trade; 3.free movement of labour; 4. environmentalism; 5. wars; 6. the criminal justice system; and 7. disease.
7.2 MONETARY AND FISCAL POLICY
land; stock employs labour. A tax which tended to drive away stock from any
particular country, would so far tend to dry up every source of revenue, both
to the sovereign and to the society.
- Adam Smith, The Wealth of Nations
THE BURDEN OF TAXATION
In 1900 the combined national and local tax burden in the U.S. was a mere 5.7% of income. By year 2000 it reached an all time high of 33%. (2) The U.K.'s tax burden has grown from 8.5 % of GDP in 1900 to 31% in 1963 and to a peak of 39% in 1982. It is now around 38%.(3)(4) The E.U.'s tax burden now averages 40.5%.(5)
The burden of taxation on middle income bracket families has grown in line with the overall increase. In 1958 the median two-earner American family ($68,605) paid 17.9% of its income in taxes. In 1998 that percentage was 37.6 % in 1998. In year 2000, taxes claimed a greater share of the median two-income family's income (39.0 percent) than food (8.9 percent), clothing (3.9 percent), housing (15.9 percent), and transportation (6.9 percent), combined.(6)The U.S now has the same household taxation levels as Britain reached at the end of the 1970s and where they remain today: between 35 and 40% of household income.(7)
HIGH LABOUR TAXES
One of the most confounding economic trends in the United States during the past 20 years has been the relative stagnation of workers' real wages. One of the primary reasons for flat wages is that taxes and other government mandates on employers have been expanding steadily, crowding out worker take-home pay. Combined Federal Income taxes and payroll taxes increase the average cost of employing a manufacturing worker by 28%.(8)
In Europe the situation is even worse, but due to the rigidity of the labour market it has caused high unemployment rather than driving wages down. In 1970, the tax-to-GDP ratio of the E.U. was similar to America but then it grew by 8 percentage points largely due to an expansion of the welfare state. The tax hike was largely imposed upon labour. The average effective tax rate on labour is about 10 percentage points higher in Europe than in the U.S. with the exception of the U.K, Ireland and Portugal whose rates are similar. The average effective tax rate imposed on labour in 1997 reached 38% compared to 24% in the U.S. This largely accounts for the high unemployment rate.(9)
THE HIDDEN TAX: INFLATION
Inflation is another form of taxation. It is an indirect tax therefore it falls as heavily on the poor as it does on the rich. In the early stages of inflation, the business class actually benefits from the easy credit. The government causes inflation by going into debt therefore is one of the major collectors of this tax. As described at the beginning of this book, the central bank prints money for the government to borrow. As John Maynard Keynes explained:
Lenin is said to have declared that the best way to destroy the capitalist system was to debauch the currency. By a continuing process of inflation, governments can confiscate, secretly and unobserved, an important part of the wealth of their citizens. By this method they not only confiscate, but they confiscate arbitrarily; and, while the process impoverishes many, it actually enriches some... The process engages all the hidden forces of economic law on the side of destruction, and does it in a manner which not one man in a million is able to diagnose.
- John Maynard Keynes, The Economic Consequences of the Peace, 1919, Ch. 6
Alan Greenspan elaborates:
Stripped of its academic jargon, the welfare state is nothing more than a mechanism by which governments confiscate the wealth of the productive members of a society to support a wide variety of welfare schemes. A substantial part of the confiscation is effected by taxation. But the welfare statists were quick to recognize that if they wished to retain political power, the amount of taxation had to be limited and they had to resort to programs of massive deficit spending, i.e., they had to borrow money, by issuing government bonds, to finance welfare expenditures on a large scale... The abandonment of the gold standard made it possible for the welfare statists to use the banking system as a means to an unlimited expansion of credit.... As the supply of money (of claims) increases relative to the supply of tangible assets in the economy, prices must eventually rise. Thus the earnings saved by the productive members of the society lose value in terms of goods. When the economy's books are finally balanced, one finds that loss in value represents the goods purchased by the government for welfare or other purposes with the money proceeds of the government bonds financed by bank credit expansion.
- Alan Greenspan, Gold and Economic Freedom, The Objectivist, July 1966 (10)
This new money can be expanded up to ten times when it passes through commercial banks therefore their private borrowers are also tax collectors as Congressman Ron Paul suggests:
An astute stock investor or home builder can make millions in the boom phase of the business cycle, while the poor and those dependent on fixed incomes can't keep up with the rising cost of living.(11)
The inflationary effect of lending is exacerbated when borrowers get into trouble and the debts are "rolled over", "re-scheduled" and eventually "bailed out". A non-performing loan causes inflation because the freshly printed money injected into the economy via the borrowing corporations and individuals has not been accompanied by a sufficient increase in production to keep up repayments. There have been some major corporate bailouts in the U.S. amounting to billions of dollars: Penn Central railroad and Lockheed in 1970, Commonwealth Bank of Detroit 1972, New York City 1975, Chrysler 1978, First Pennsylvania Bank of Philadelphia 1979 and Chicago's Continental Illinois in 1982. All of these were saved from bankruptcy by Congress acting as lender of last with the guarantee of freshly printed money from the Fed. This is inflationary not just in the final stage where money is sourced from the Fed but in the first, second and all the other intermediary stages on the way to default. (12)
The main event in the bail-out Super Bowl has not been played at home. It's the game between Third World governments and the IMF/World Bank. All of these non-performing loans to foreign governments cause domestic inflation when the new money eventually returns to our shores in exchange for our products and services. Loans to most Third World governments started to fail by 1982. By 1983 third world governments owed $300 billion to banks and $400 billion to western governments.(13)
In preparation for the bail-out phase of the international lending Super Bowl, the U.S. central bank was brought onto the field in 1980, when Congress passed the Monetary Control Act authorizing the Fed to print money for foreign governments.(14) Since then, the size of bailout packages has become mind-boggling.
Mexico is just one example of the IMF/World Bank Third World bailout system. In 1982 it owed $85 billion to the banks, an inflationary loss to the American taxpayer which is being sustained to this day by central banks who initially made new loans and eventually underwrote almost the entire debt. In 1982 the IMF organized a $4.5 billion loan from Western central banks, and in 1989, a further $7.5 billion. This is the roll-over and reschedule play, whose purpose is to enable interest payments to continue on the original non-performing commercial loans and prevent them going into default and bankrupting the commercial banks. However the day of reckoning inevitably arrives: Mexico could no longer afford even the interest payments. On 31 January 1995, President Clinton, acting independently of Congress, authorized a $50 billion package of loan guarantees: $20 billion from the U.S Exchange Stabilization Fund, $17.8 billion from the IMF, $10 billion from the Bank of International Settlements and $3 billion from commercial banks.(15)
Joseph Stiglitz declared one of the functions of the central bank /IMF/WorldBank to be a banker's welfare system. In relation to the $95 billion bailout package during the 1997 Asian crisis:
The money served another function: it enabled the countries to provide dollars to the firms that had borrowed from western bankers to repay the loans. It was thus, in part, a bailout to the international banks as much as it was to the country.(16)
Whilst the commercial banks profit from the interest rates, which are often vastly inflated for debtor governments, the Western taxpayer pays off the loans through inflation at home. This system is designed to go on forever, draining the West of its wealth in order to build socialist dictatorships abroad and enrich the banking elite. The total foreign debt of low and middle income countries rose from $1.4 trillion in 1990 to $2.3 trillion in 2001.(17)
To summarize inflation: There are three bands of thieves who work as a cartel. The central banks acting as lender of last resort have enabled the commercial banks and the government to expand the money supply at our cost by increasing government deficit spending, sustaining non-performing loans and bailing out major corporate failures. Since 1971 when Nixon destroyed the last remnants of the Gold Standard, the U.S. national debt has increased from $408 billion to $6.8 trillion, a 1600% increase. In 1971, M3 money supply was $776 billion; today it stands at $8.9 trillion, a 1100% increase. During that time the dollar has lost almost 80% of its purchasing power.(18) In addition to all the other state and federal taxes, the hapless taxpayer has paid another 5% per year in inflation.(19)
A 1999 UK Parliamentary report shows that inflation in Britain accelerated after WWII. The pre-war annual inflation rate was about 2.5% and the post -war rate averaged 6%. Over the whole century, the Pound lost 98.5% of its purchasing power.(20) It is no coincidence that during this period the gap between rich and poor and the size of government has grown significantly.
DEPRESSIONS: MONETARY AND FISCAL TIGHTENING
In Globalization and its Discontents, Joseph Stiglitz describes how the contractionary policies of the IMF exacerbated the 1997 east Asia crisis. In any economic downturn, there is a standard government response: stimulate demand by either cutting taxes, increase expenditures, or loosen monetary policy. The IMF pushed exactly the opposite course. By continuing to advocate contractionary policies the IMF caused the contagion to spread from one country to the next as exports decreased. The IMF monetary remedy was to impose interest rate hikes of more than 25%, throwing fuel onto the fire.(21) This had the effect of driving even more capital out of the country as it pushed companies towards bankruptcy. Furthermore it imposed restructuring in the banking sector which closed down any banks with significant non-performing loans. In Indonesia, sixteen private banks were closed which caused a run on the remaining private banks and a retreat of capital to the state run banks. The effect on the Indonesian banking system and the economy was disastrous.(22) Riots followed when welfare, especially food and fuel subsidies for the poor, were cut back. Businessmen and their families were targeted. This exacerbated the retreat of capital out of the country since riots do not restore business confidence.
According to Greg palast's interviews with Stiglitz, "IMF riots" were virtually written into the 111 conditionalities formulated at the end of the 1980s. One of the IMF condionalities on Ecuador was to raise the price of cooking gas by 80% at the same time as they were cutting back pensions and laying off government workers. Poor Andean Indians came down from the hills and set fire to cars in the capital bringing troops onto the streets.(23) In Argentina, when the banks put their interest rates up to 21-70%, the government had to change the law against loan-sharking because the banks would have been in breach of it.
Stiglitz laments that deepening a recession not only causes more pain today but also more pain tomorrow. An economy which has a deep recession may grow faster as it recovers, but it never makes up for lost time. The deeper today's recession, the lower income is likely to be twenty years from now.(24)
The IMF was not the first to use fiscal tightening as a weapon of economic warfare. In 1920-21, America went through an agricultural depression. This was caused solely by the monetary policy of the Government and Federal Reserve. The farmers had borrowed large amounts of money to buy land at the instance of the government. They had become very prosperous. However, with an eye on closing down the smaller banks in the South West, the Wall St. controlled Fed decided to drastically cut credit in May 1920. Unable to keep up repayments, thousands of farmers were bankrupted and brought down their local banks with them. G. Edward Griffin describes this episode as "Country-Duck Dinner in New York."(25) However, this was just the starter before the main course. At the behest of the Wall St. Money Trust, the Open Market Committee was formed in 1922, to coordinate the purchase of Treasury bonds by the twelve regional Reserve banks. From 1923 onwards low interest rates caused new money to flood into the economy causing a massive speculative boom on the stock market. By 1929, half of retail transactions were on credit.(26) On 9 August 1929, the Fed started selling Treasury bonds in the open market and reversed its easy credit policy. It raised interest rates on loans to commercial banks to 6% and the money supply rapidly contracted; speculators who had borrowed money to purchase shares could no longer keep up repayments to their brokers. The pin had been inserted. On 29 October 1929, an avalanche of selling on Wall Street wiped out millions of investors. The bankers and their preferred clients had exited the market long before only to re-enter at rock bottom and devour stock like sharks in a feeding frenzy. Some of the greatest fortunes in America were made in this fashion.
Today, consumers in the U.K. and U.S. hold record levels of debt. These extreme debt ratios make us very vulnerable to the maneuvers used in the past. Figures from the U.K. Office for National Statistics showed that consumers now owed an average of £5,330 ( about $8500) in unsecured debt, which excludes mortgages.(27)
Fiscal and monetary policy has been used by the bankers to redistribute wealth to themselves and the corporations they control as well as to national governments. Whilst taxation policy is overt, a hidden transfer of wealth is achieved by monetary policy- the public endure inflation whilst the debtor governments grow in size and the bankers grow rich collecting interest on the loans that cause it. The fleecing of the Western taxpayer accelerated during the post-War period, with the creation of the IMF/World bank.
7.3 FREE TRADE AGREEMENTS
On 1 January 1995, The World Trade Organization replaced The Global Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT) which had regulated global trade tariffs since 1947.(28) Three months before, Sir James Goldsmith, a British billionaire,gave a speech to the U.S. senate in which he warned about the effect global free trade would have on Western employment and wage levels.(29) Goldsmith argued that GATT and the theories on which it is based were flawed. If implemented, it would impoverish and destabilize the industrialized world while at the same time cruelly ravaging the third world. The principle of global free trade is that anything can be manufactured anywhere in the world to be sold anywhere else. That means that these new entrants into the world economy are in direct competition with the workforces of developed countries. In most developed countries, the cost to an average manufacturing company of paying its workforce is an amount equal to between 25 percent and 30 per cent of sales. If such a company decides to maintain in its home country only its head office and sales force, while transferring its production to a low-cost area, it will save about 20 percent of sales volume. For every French employee, a company could have recruited 47 Vietnamese. Many economists believe that the growth in service industries will compensate for lost jobs in manufacturing. However even service industries will be subjected to substantial transfers of employment to low-cost areas.
On the other hand, the real cost to consumers of cheaper goods will be that they will lose their jobs, get paid less for their work and have to face higher taxes to cover the social cost of increased unemployment. According to figures published by the U.S. Department of Labor, since 1973 real hourly and weekly earnings, in inflation-adjusted dollars, have already dropped respectively by 13.4 per cent and 19.2 per cent, and that was before the 1995 GATT negotiations known as the Uruguay Round. If 4 billion people enter the same world market for labour and offer their work at a fraction of the price paid to people in the developed world, it is obvious that such a massive increase in supply will reduce the value of labour. Organized labour will lose practically all its negotiating power.
Regional free trade zones should only be established between countries with similar levels of economic development. The 1957 Treaty of Rome between France, Germany, Italy, Belgium, the Netherlands and Luxembourg created the European Economic Community, the largest free market in the world. Within the EEC, there would be no tariffs, no barriers, and a free and competitive market. Trade with nations outside the EEC would be subject to a single tariff. This concept was known as community preference. In other words, priority would be given to European jobs and industry. About twenty years ago, quietly, the technocrats who run Europe started to alter this fundamental principle and move progressively towards international free trade. Ever since, unemployment in Europe has swollen despite growth in GNP. The 1992 Treaty of Maastricht enshrines this change and makes global free trade one of the fundamental principles on which the new Europe is to be built.
Regarding the economic success of Hong Kong, South Korea and Taiwan, special economic concessions granted by the West combined with their cheap and skilled labour made them successful. Over the past thirty years the balance of trade between these countries and the West has resulted in a transfer of tens of billions of dollars to them. However, a balance of trade in monetary terms can disguise huge job losses because, as Mr Goldsmith noted, he could employ 47 Vietnamese for the price of one Frenchman.
JOB LOSSES DUE TO NAFTA
The U.S. has lost millions of manufacturing jobs due to a growing trade deficit over the past three decades. This trend accelerated when The North Atlantic Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA) was signed by the U.S., Canada and Mexico, designed to remove tariff barriers over a fifteen year period. NAFTA eliminated 766,030 actual and potential U.S. jobs between 1994 and 2000 because of the rapid growth in the net U.S. export deficit with Mexico and Canada. The majority of the job losses were in the manufacturing sector so workers who found jobs in the service sector are paid on average 23% less. Almost all new American jobs being created are in this sector and wages in the manufacturing sector are kept down due to the threat of job relocation overseas. The growth in U.S. trade and trade deficits has put downward pressure on the wages of "unskilled" (i.e., non-college-educated) workers in the U.S., especially those with no more than a high school degree. This group represents 72.7% of the total U.S. workforce and includes most middle and low wage workers. A large body of economic research has concluded that trade is responsible for at least 15-25% of the growth in wage inequality in the U.S. (U.S. Trade Deficit Review Commission 2000, 110-18).(30)(31) In some areas of the U.S. the loss of manufacturing jobs to Mexico has caused disturbing levels of poverty. Since George Bush won Ohio in the 2000 presidential elections, the state has lost one in six of its manufacturing jobs. A string of local factories have relocated to Mexico in the last two years. Two million of the state's 11 million population resorted to food charities in 2002, an increase of more than 18% from 2001.(32)
WHITE COLLAR JOB LOSSES
A study by Forrester Research predicts that U.S. companies will transfer 3.3 million service jobs overseas by 2015, compared with just 102,000 jobs shifted in 2000. The job exports are predominantly in the areas of information technology (including software and product development), customer service, back-office accounting and sales.(33) On 10 August 2003, USA Today warned that white collar workers are going to experience the devastating job losses that occurred in manufacturing in the previous thirty years. Almost any professional job that can be done long distance is suddenly up for grabs. Jobs done by financial analysts, architectural drafters, telemarketers, accountants, claims adjusters, home loan processors and others at higher levels of the labour food chain are being farmed out to workers in other countries. "We're not just talking about call-center jobs, but all kinds of jobs," says Deloitte Consulting analyst Christopher Gentle. "It doesn't leave any part of the corporation untouched." Major U.S. companies, including such giants as IBM, Microsoft and Procter & Gamble, are leading the pack. Tens of thousands of jobs already have been shipped out, and analysts project that millions more will go -- just as the fragile economy attempts a rebound. "We see it as a threat to America's middle-class work force, in terms of wages and benefits," says Marcus Courtney, president of Washington Alliance of Technology Workers in Seattle. "The service sector is not immune to the forces of globalization. We're talking about highly skilled, best-paying jobs. It's raising the concern of workers."(34)
In the U.K., HSBC Bank just announced that it is shipping 4000 back office jobs from the U.K. to Asia. By 2006, that will have increased to 7000, 13% of its current U.K. workforce.(35)
7.4 OPEN BORDERS
Whilst free-trade allows capital to travel to developing countries in search of cheap labour, lax immigration controls have allowed cheap labour to travel to the West in search of capital.
The immigrant population in the United States has increased to 33 million, a five percent increase in the last two years. The new Census Bureau data show that immigrants account for 11.8 percent of the U.S. population. In California 27% of the population are foreign born. The immigrant population in the U.S. is now larger than the entire population of Canada.(36) 9 million Mexicans make up 30% of these foreign born residents. Over a third of them are illegals.(37)
BLUE COLLAR WORKERS
Throughout the economic boom of the 90s, when the unemployment rate got as low as 3.9 percent, economists marveled at the U.S. economy's ability to grow jobs without sparking wage-led inflation. Many speculated that the waves of low-paid immigrants had created a "safety valve," keeping average wages low enough for the economy to grow without an increase in prices. An article in the Labor Department's "Monthly Labor Review" has laid out just how important those foreign-born workers were for the U.S economy: foreign-born workers earned about 75.6 cents for every dollar earned by the native born in 2000.(38) Economic theory suggests that immigration that is complementary to the native workforce can boost wages all round. The most extreme example is Middle East countries that have oil but no oil expertise, so importing oil industry workers from the West makes the locals rich. In contrast, substitute workers are likely to reduce the wages of those they compete with in the labour market while boosting the profits of the owners of capital. However, the lower cost of production associated with cheaper labour makes goods cheaper and keeps wage inflation down. George Borjas, professor of political economy at Harvard University, an authority on the economics of migration, is sceptical of claims that immigration boosts wages when it goes beyond meeting skills shortages. "I find very sizeable negative effects of immigration on wages," he says. "The numerical effect is strong and the statistical significance is strong. It will turn the economics of migration on its head."(39)
The National Academy of Sciences estimates that approximately 44 percent of wage depression among low-skilled Americans ( 70% of workforce) during 1980-1994 was due to immigration. Also an estimated 1,880,000 American workers are displaced from their jobs every year by immigration.(40)(41)
The American food and agriculture system has become dependent on foreign-born workers, a substantial number of whom are illegals. Until 15 or 20 years ago, meatpacking plants in the United States were staffed by highly paid, unionized employees who earned about $18 an hour, adjusted for inflation. Today, the processing and packing plants are largely staffed by low-paid non-union workers from Mexico and Guatemala. Many of them start at $6 an hour. A few years ago, the Immigration and Naturalization Service estimated that about 25 percent of meatpacking workers in the Midwest were probably illegals.(42) A government study estimated that nearly 40 percent of farm labourers are illegals.
WHITE COLLAR WORKERS
Immigration has also suppressed wages of white collar workers because U.S immigration has granted huge numbers of working visas. More than 100,000 American computer programmers are unemployed but when those who are underemployed or working in other jobs because they cannot find programming jobs, the total grows to about half a million. At the same time, more than 450,000 H-1B visa workers are employed as programmers in the United States.(43)
I.T. companies are subcontracting thousands of jobs to outsourcing companies such as Tata, Infosys Technologies, and Wipro Technologies, the three largest Indian software servicing companies, who can provide Indian employees who will work for a third of the wages.(44) Furthermore a 2001 National Research Council report found that H-1Bs have an adverse impact on overall wage levels. The Independent Computer Consultants Association reports that the use of cheaper foreign labour has forced down the hourly rates of U.S. consultants by as much as 10 to 40 percent.(45)
BY DESIGN NOT BY ACCIDENT
None of this has come about by chance: Since 1986, Congress has passed 7 amnesties for illegal aliens. The 1986 Immigration Reform and Control Act (IRCA) gave amnesty - legal forgiveness - to all illegal aliens who had successfully evaded justice for four years or more or were illegally working in agriculture. As a result, 2.8 million illegal aliens were admitted as legal immigrants to the United States. Amnesties to date total 3,356,021.(46) Cheered on by editorials in the The Wall St Journal,(47) President of Mexico Vincente Fox, is currently negotiating a blanket amnesty of millions of Mexican workers.(48) Republicans and Democrats are proposing different pieces of legislation which, if all passed, would give amnesty to all 8-11 million illegals. This is one of many steps being taken to merge Mexico and the U.S. as a prelude to a Pan-American Union from Alaska to Chile.(49)
Research indicates that, on current trends, we can now expect a net inflow of at least 2 million non E.U. citizens per decade.(50) Total net Immigration from outside the E.U. has more than trebled in the past five years and is still rising. Each year nearly a quarter of a million people come to live in Britain.(51)
However this is nothing compared to the problem looming from the newly enlarged E.U. The floodgates for cheap labour opened on 1st May 2004 when 10 former Eastern Bloc countries join the E.U. making their 73 million citizens eligible to work anywhere within the EEA. Created in 1992 The European Economic Area (EEA) consists of the 15 member states of the European Union (EU) plus Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein. There is free movement of people, goods and services within the area. So long as nationals of the countries are exercising their freedoms under these the various treaties, they are not strictly subject to immigration control, and may work or set up in business without restriction. These rights extend also to members of the households of EEA nationals accompanying them to the U.K.. 13 countries have applied to become new members: 10 of these countries -Cyprus, the Czech Republic, Estonia, Hungary, Latvia, Lithuania, Malta, Poland, the Slovak Republic, and Slovenia joined on 1st May 2004. They are currently known by the term "acceding countries". Bulgaria and Romania hope to do so by 2007, and Turkey is currently negotiating its membership.(52)
The E.U. estimates that around 335,000 people will migrate each year from Eastern Europe after the barriers to free movement come down, including 100,000 workers. This may be a deliberate understatement of the tidal wave of cheap labour which is about to demolish wage levels in Western Europe.(53)
Another revolution is quietly taking place in another aspect of immigration aimed directly at the middle class. The Government has been clamping down on illegal immigration but massively expanding legal migration for skilled workers, most noticeably through expanding the work permit scheme to about 200,000 people this year. David Blunkett, the Home Secretary, has said he is proud to have produced the largest work permit programme of any country. These workers will be able to bring their families and, on past form, most will be accepted for settlement after 4-5 years if they so wish. This massive expansion of the work permit scheme therefore represents a major new avenue of immigration. The Government has also set up the Highly Skilled Migrant Programme, which has so far brought in 3,000 of the of the world's brightest and best. The scheme makes it easier for foreign students to carry on working in the U.K. after their course finishes. No doubt many will come from poor countries and will accept significantly lower salaries than native workers.(54)(55)
The effect of immigration policy on the labour market is the same as in the U.S.. While the highly skilled in London enjoy wages up to 80 per cent higher than the national average, a recent report by Incomes Data Services showed that shelf-fillers in London suffer wages 10 per cent below the national average. Immigration has pushed unemployment 2 per cent higher than it would otherwise be. National unemployment has been at just over 5 per cent for two years now, and in London, where most immigrants live, unemployment is the second highest in the UK at 6.6 per cent.(56) Britain's top labour economist, Professor Richard Layard of London School of Economics, who helped to design Labour's welfare to work programme, stated in a letter to the Financial Times:
There is a huge amount of evidence that any increase in the number of unskilled workers lowers unskilled wages and increases the unskilled unemployment rate. If we are concerned about fairness, we ought not to ignore these facts. Employers gain from unskilled immigration. But the unskilled do not.(57)
The elite have promoted free trade and open borders with full knowledge of their destructive consequences. Poor workers are glad to work for higher wages either by migrating to the West or by working in the new steel factory at home. This analysis has not addressed their plight, which is already well documented, but has shown the serious damage to employment and wage levels in the West.
THE REPORT FROM IRON MOUNTAIN, 1966
The purpose of the study was to analyze methods by which a government can perpetuate itself in power. The authors concluded that, in the past, war has been the only reliable means to achieve that goal. Under world government, however, war would be impossible so the challenge was to find other methods for controlling populations and keeping them loyal to their leaders. It concluded that a suitable substitute for war would require a new enemy which posed a frightful threat to survival. Neither the threat nor the enemy had to be real, they merely had to be believable. Several surrogates for war were considered, including a staged space-alien invasion, but the only one holding real promise was the environmental pollution model. This was viewed as the most likely to succeed because firstly, it could be related to observable conditions such as smog and water pollution - in other words, it would be based partly on fact and, therefore, believable. Secondly, predictions could be made showing end-of-earth scenarios just as horrible as atomic warfare. Accuracy in these predictions would not be important. Their purpose would be to frighten, not to inform. Not only does the environmental pollution model justify expansive and authoritarian government, it also requires citizens to impoverish themselves thereby widening the gap between leaders and followers.
Matching the Iron Mountain brief, part of the environmental movement aims to reduce living standards in the West, especially in the U.S.. The questionable intellectual credibility for this plan was provided in the benchmark publication from Massachusetts Institute of Technology, The Limits To Growth, commissioned by The Club of Rome in 1972. The book introduced the concept that the environment would be irrevocably damaged if its "carrying capacity" was breached. On current trends it predicted total collapse of industrial civilization in the second half of the twenty-first century unless capital and population growth were severely limited. Whilst polices designed to reduce consumption under the rubric of 'sustainable development' are high on the political agenda, real environmental health and pollution issues are either being swept under the carpet or being created by the petrochemical- pharmaceutical cartel. The last chapter of this book proves that, actually, the elite regard human beings as Earth's primary contaminant.
A few years after the Report from Iron Mountain was published in 1966, the environmental movement was hijacked by the banking cartel. Instead of staying focused on scientific study of conservation, it became a catch-all for a radical political agenda, now spearheaded by ex-KGB chief Mikhail Gorbachev and his Western banker colleague Stephen Rockefeller.(58)
Dr Michael Coffman's fascinating article Why Property Rights Matter, details the high-level funding of environmentalism:
In a dazzling display of raw power, foundations with interlocking directorates funded the Nature Conservancy in 1996 to the tune of $203,886,056, or 60 percent of its annual revenue. Initially the foundations banded together under the name Environmental Grantmakers Affinity Group of the Council on Foundations. Under the umbrella of Rockefeller Family Fund 136 foundations formed the Environmental Grantmakers Association (EGA) in 1987 which has grown to over 200 by the end of the twentieth century. Congressman Richard Pombo (R-CA) claimed in 1999 that there are "3,400 full time employees, including leaders who often make $150,000 or more, as well as a small army of outside contractors such as scientists, lobbyists, lawyers, and public affairs specialists" in Washington DC. Citing a 1999 Boston Globe article, Congressman Pombo said: …"foundations invest at least $400 million a year in environmental advocacy and research. The largest environmental grant-maker, Pew Charitable Trusts, gives more than $35 million annually to environmental groups ".....When the additional 2,300 foundations that donate to environmental activism are considered, plus the billion dollars or so contracted to environmental organizations by various agencies of the federal government, the Boston Globe [ newspaper] estimates the total funding for environmental activism to be around four billion dollars annually!".(59)
Substantial financing and leadership of the United Nations came directly from the corporate elite as well as from national governments. In 1946 John D. Rockefeller Jr. brought the U.N. to America by gifting $8 million for the purchase of the land for the U.N. building in New York. Canadian multi-billionaire and Rockefeller associate, Maurice Strong, was the first Director of the U.N. Environmental Program (UNEP) created after The Stockholm Conference, ('Earth Summit 1') in 1972. Mr Strong was secretary general of all three Earth Summits 1972, 1992, and 1997. He initiated The Earth Charter Project in 1994, the 'Ten Commandments' of sustainable development. Gorbachev was co-chair of The Earth Charter Commission and Stephen Rockefeller was Chair of the drafting committee. The ceremony to launch the Earth Charter initiative in May 2000, involved the presentation of the document to regular Bilderberg attendee, Her Majesty Queen Beatrix of The Netherlands. This illustrates how top-down the environmental movement is, despite its significant grass-roots support.(60)
The Earth Charter developed an earlier Rockefeller initiative, the 1972 Rockefeller Brothers Fund report entitled Use of Land: A Citizen's Policy Guide to Urban Growth. This was a bench-mark publication on subjecting property rights to government censure.(61) Ted Turner is another multi-billionaire environmentalist. In September 1997 he set up The United Nations Foundation to distribute funds to U.N programmes with a gift of (U.S.) $1 billion.(62) Former Nazi SS officer and I.G. Farben employee, Prince Bernhard of The Netherlands was one of the founders of The World Wildlife Fund in 1961.(63) Britain's Prince Philip was the first President of the World Wildlife Fund UK (WWF) from its formation in 1961 to 1982, and International President of WWF (later the World Wide Fund for Nature) from 1981 to 1996. Since 1985, World Wildlife Fund has invested over 1.5 billion dollars in 11,000 projects in 130 countries.(64) Prince Philip also founded the Alliance of Religions and Conservation in 1995.(65) Prince Charles set up The Prince of Wales Business Leaders Forum in 1990 to promote environmental issues in the business world and it now has support from 65 major multinational corporations.(66)
Less than 5 percent of the U.S. is urban, but urban areas comprise 77.2 percent of the population. The population density in the U.S. is only 77.7 people per square mile, compared to the U.K. which is 629.4. The reason the environmental lobby has been so successful in the U.S. since the 1970's is that the courts have generally ruled in favour of the primacy of public use when judging property rights. In the spirit of Rousseau, the thrust of the 1972 Use of Land report supported the premise that development rights of private property owners should be censured by the government. Environmental protection areas would be protected "not by purchase but through the police power of the federal government." The Endangered Species Act was passed the following year, a key weapon for restricting property rights.
The plundering of rural America has gotten so bad that a Wall Street Journal editorial on 26 July 2001, called it "rural cleansing". The WSJ cites the case in which the federal court forced the Bureau of Reclamation to cut off irrigation water in April 2001 that undeniably belonged to 1400 farmers in the Klamath Basin Irrigation Project, a watershed straddling the California and Oregon border. The action turned their once lush green farmland to swirling dust reminiscent of the Oklahoma dust bowl days of the 1930s Great Depression. The suit began in 1988 when two sucker fish were listed as "endangered" under the Endangered Species Act of 1973. The coho salmon was later added as a threatened species. Citing the U.S. Endangered Species Act, Oregon District Judge Ann Aiken ruled in Federal Court on April 6, 2001, to give all the water to the endangered species. The decision was the result of a lawsuit brought by the Oregon Natural Resources Council (ONRC).(67)
The WSJ claimed , "The goal of many environmental groups - from the Sierra Club to the…ONRC - is no longer to protect nature. It is to expunge humans from the countryside." Just as in the Klamath basin example, the WSJ determined that,
The strategy of these environmental groups is almost always the same: to sue or lobby the government into declaring rural areas off-limits to people who live and work there. The tools for doing this are the Endangered Species Act and local preservation laws, most of which are so loosely crafted as to allow a wide leeway in their implementation. In some cases the owners loose their property outright. More often the environmentalists' goal is to have restrictions placed on the land that either render it unusable or persuade owners to leave of their own accord.
Congressman Richard Pombo laments this attack on America's natural resource-based industries:
Federal policies implemented as a result of environmental advocacy financed by private foundations are trampling on property rights. They are shutting down the timber industry, the mining industry and the oil and gas industry. These policies are creating misery in rural areas dependent on resource production. Small communities and families in rural areas are reeling, while environmental groups are collecting rewards of six figure grants from rich, private foundations. Why is this sort of activity subsidized by the taxpayer?
The land grab is also being directed by the federal government. President Clinton used the 1906 Antiquities Act to set aside tens of millions of acres of federal land as national monuments preventing any commercial use. In 1998 he initiated the Clean Water Action Plan which withdraws thousands of miles of federal roads and also imposes buffer zones of natural habitat on private land along millions of miles of streams and rivers.(68) Following the 1968 U.N. Conference on Man and the Biosphere, the U.S. government instituted their own program called The United States Man and the Biosphere Program-U.S. MAB. There are currently 47 biosphere reserves and 20 World Heritage Sites in America, as designated by the U.N.. The counties surrounding the biosphere reserves/World Heritage Sites are "buffer zones." At some point there will be no human activity in the biospheres and the buffer zones are to protect the biospheres where there will be limited human activity.(69) This plan first appeared as part of The Wildlands Project, a grandiose design to transform 50% of the U.S. into a biosphere cleansed of modern industry and private property and the rest into buffer zones. The U.S. Senate came close to endorsing this plan in 1994 when considering ratifying the U.N. Biodiversity Treaty. At the eleventh hour it was pointed out that the study on which the Treaty was based, the 1994 Global Biodiversity Assessment, endorsed the Wildlands Project strategy.(70) The Biodiversity Treaty also proposes an unaccountable U.N. Trusteeship Council to regulate any human activity that presents potential harm to biological diversity.
With 1.8 million acres Ted Turner, billionaire and radical environmentalist, is now the largest land owner in America. According to Forbes Magazine,
Despite his reputation as a die-hard conservationist, the cable pioneer makes plenty of money off his land. He sells bison meat to restaurants (including his own). He opened some of his New Mexico holdings to gas and coal exploration. Timber is harvested and sold. Hunting and fishing fees generate $5 million a year. "I'm doing things as natural as I can and trying to make some money at the same time" (71)
The key principles of The Use of Land were adopted at the 1976 U.N. Conference on Human Settlements (Habitat I) held in Vancouver:
Land... cannot be treated as an ordinary asset, controlled by individuals and subject to the pressures and inefficiencies of the market. Private land ownership is also a principal instrument of accumulation and concentration of wealth and therefore contributes to social injustice... Public control of land use is therefore indispensable.
"Smart growth" advocates seek to preserve land in a natural or agricultural state by encouraging individuals to live in denser communities that take up smaller tracts of land per housing unit. Such communities also encourage residents to rely more on walking or public transit than on cars for mobility, and they more closely mix retail and other commercial facilities with residential units to foster easy access to jobs and shopping. The density of the average U.S. suburban area is 1-3 housing units per acre. The Sierra Club's definition of urban efficiency is 100 units per acre. Reaching that goal, however, would require living arrangements that are 2.4 times as dense as all Manhattan, twice as dense as central Paris, and ten times that of San Francisco. At least nineteen states have state growth-management laws or task forces to protect farmland and open space. Dozens of cities and counties have adopted urban growth boundaries to contain development and prevent the spread of urbanization to outlying and rural areas. Portland Oregon is a model for smart growth and since the 1970s it has had the most stringent planning laws in the U.S..(72) The Federal Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) partially funded a 2002 report called Growing Smart Legislative Guidebook: Model Statutes for Planning and the Management of Change by the American Planning Association (APA). This report not only applies the smart growth principle to future land use, but also to current land use by introducing the idea of "amortization of non-conforming uses. " This will require the local government to seize property without just compensation where property owners fail to adjust the use of their property to fit revised zoning ordinances or new plans for a particular geographical area in the community.(73)
One of the key concepts of the sustainable development agenda is "Factor 10". This theory proposes exponential decrease in resource use especially in OECD countries which are required to reduce material consumption by 90%. (74) The 1994 statement of the Factor Ten Club demands and end to private property:
The process of dematerialization must involve a shift in thinking toward the 'life-cycle' approach, meaning that improvements are in no way limited to products, but can and will have to incorporate changes in the way products are produced, packaged, transported, sold, used, reused, cascaded, recycled and disposed of... Use-sharing, renting, leasing and borrowing are just a few examples of concepts which result in reduced material flows.
It also demands increasing the cost of capital (natural resources) in relation to labour using taxation.(75)
Whereas the first U.N. Habitat Conference in 1974 dealt with land use issues, Habitat II in June 1996 dealt with consumption issues. The underlying theme was that people of the world would have to pay a tax for the usage or depletion of a resource in addition to the service provided. Therefore, if you pay $1.00 per thousand cubic feet for water consumed, they are then saying that they want you to pay another $1.00 for the depletion of the water used. What the World Bank and IMF are working on is to find a formula to measure how much a person produces at their job and at home. From that amount they would then subtract out how much of the Earth's resources they use such as water, energy, food, material, heat, etc.. If the net figure is a plus, the person is adding back to the Earth's resources. If it is a negative, he is taking away from the earth's resources and is therefore a bad global citizen.(76)
The conference identified Public-Private Partnership as instrumental to this task. The Public-Private Partnerships for the Urban Environment initiated by the United Nations Development Programme (UNDP) became operational in 1996, the year of the Habitat II conference. (77) This is the key socio-economic component of the global feudal state. Whilst property is transferred into the hands of a private ruling elite, the use of that property by the masses will be regulated by a large body of laws restricting consumption and consumer choice.
As described in chapter 6, Prince Charles' Prince of Wales Business Leaders Forum (PWBLF) was set up in 1990 to promote Public-Private Partnership. The official website of PWBLF makes specific reference to key role of PPP market regulation in the New World Order:
The International Business Leaders Forum is an international educational charity set up in 1990 to promote responsible business practices internationally that benefit business and society, and which help to achieve social, economic and environmentally sustainable development, particularly in new and emerging market economies. From the outset, the Forum has pursued three pathways:
· in making the case that in the new world order,[emphasis added] well-led and competitive businesses have a positive role to play in development challenges, through responsible core business practices and engagement with society
· in showing that - while partnership and collective action is difficult - in the networked society it is essential to combine business skills and resources with community support and public accountability
· in demonstrating that scale can only be achieved and economic exclusion addressed through `enabling environments' in which governments, international institutions and the media play a part.(78)
This is preparation for the strait jacket of U.N. environmental and social legislation being fastened onto to the global economy. its main purpose is to reducing living standards, restrict consumer choice, and limit property rights in order to empower the ruling elite.
THE GLOBAL WARMING SCAM
Whilst there are many real and serious environmental problems, man-made global warming is a contrived political issue. The end of earth scenarios linked to global warming have been successful in mobilizing public opinion in favour of reducing industrial activity in order to cut CO2 emissions. However, an independent petition organized by the Oregon Institute for Science and Medicine signed by 17,000 independent scientists states that increased CO2 levels do not cause deleterious changes in climate or weather; indeed they lead to increased plant growth.(79)
Iron Mountain style propaganda has resulted in a raft of anti-car measures being introduced across the developed world. Private motoring has to rank as one of the highest achievements in personal freedom of the twentieth century. Now the elite are doing everything possible to curtail that freedom. A tax on carbon is now one of the major proposals of advocates of global taxation(80) and the U.K. government has already announced plans to impose satellite vehicle tracking and road tolls (see chapter 12).
7.6 WAR AS A MEANS OF PLANNED WASTE
The blueprint for the economic destruction of the U.S through war is the policy paper entitled Rebuilding America's Defenses written by the neo-conservative think-tank Project for the New American Century in year 2000. (81) It recognizes the need to pursue an indeterminate series of wars in order to protect American interests. The U.S. Government has also stated that the War on Terror may never end.
In 1984 George Orwell outlined the real Machiavellian purpose of war:
The primary aim of modem warfare... is to use up the products of the machine without raising the general standard of living... The essential act of war is destruction, not necessarily of human lives, but of the products of human labour. War is a way of shattering to pieces, or pouring into the stratosphere, or sinking into the depths of the sea, materials which might otherwise be used to make the masses too comfortable...
The Report From Iron Mountain repeats Orwell's conclusion:
The production of weapons of mass destruction has always been associated with economic "waste." The term is pejorative, since it implies a failure of function. But no human activity can properly be considered wasteful if it achieves its contextual objective... In the case of military "waste," there is indeed a larger social utility. In advanced modern democratic societies, the war system... has served as the last great safeguard against the elimination of necessary social classes... The continuance of the war system must be assured, if for no other reason, among others, than to preserve whatever quality and degree of poverty a society requires as an incentive, as well as to maintain the stability of its internal organization of power.
OVERALL ECONOMIC COSTS OF CRIME
U.S. expenditure on prisons is currently $ 46 billion a year. The overall cost of crime in terms of lost productivity is in excess of $1 trillion per year.(82) Put another way, total loss of productivity due to crime is 10% of GDP (10.4 trillion in 2002). Including stolen assets the figure is $1.7 trillion. This has not come about by chance. Increasing the crime rate has been deliberate policy of the U.S. government over the last two decades and drug crime has been central to it.
THE WAR ON DRUGS
The total economic cost of drug abuse and drug crime in the U.S between 1992 and 2000 is calculated at $1.1 trillion, increasing each year from $102 billion in 1992 to $160 billion in 2000.(83) Lost productivity accounted for 69% and health costs 9%. Imprisonment is the single largest cause of lost productivity, accounting for 30% of the total.
THE COCAINE IMPORT AGENCY (CIA)
In March 1998, the CIA Inspector General testified that there had existed a secret agreement between the CIA and the Justice Department, wherein "during the years 1982 to 1995, the CIA did not have to report the drug trafficking by its assets to the Justice Department."(84)(85) As Michael Levine commented,
"..[to]a trained DEA agent this literally means that the CIA had been granted a license to obstruct justice in our so-called war on drugs; a license that lasted, so the CIA claims, from 1982 to 1995." That understanding remained in effect until August of 1995, when Attorney General Janet Reno rescinded the agreement. The CIA collusion with allied drug traffickers led to the formation of a protected narcotics pipeline, resulting an increase in supply and drop in price. Former DEA agents have repeatedly pointed out that 50%-70% of the cocaine entering the U.S. went via drug cartels that enjoyed CIA protection.(86)
Despite the exponential growth in spending on the alleged "drug war", illicit drugs are cheaper and purer than they were two decades ago, and continue to be readily available. Between 1981 and 1998, the price of heroin and cocaine dropped sharply while their levels of purity rose.
DRUG OFFENDERS ACCOUNT FOR THE EXPLODING PRISON POPULATION
In 2001 the Federal Bureau of Investigation's Uniform Crime Reports (UCR) estimated that there were 1,586,900 State and local arrests for drug abuse violations in the U.S. an increase of 200% from the half million in arrests 1982 when the War on Drugs began. This accounted for 11.5% of all arrests.(87) The War on Drugs has resulted in the arrest, prosecution and incarceration of tens of thousands of persons each year for crimes associated with the sale, possession and use of illegal drugs. 500,000 drug offenders are in prison, 25% of a two million prison population.(88)
In 1986 and 1988 Congress enacted mandatory minimum sentencing laws, which forced judges to deliver fixed sentences to individuals convicted of a crime, regardless of culpability or other mitigating factors. The most common mandatory sentences are for 5 and 10 years, and are based on the weight of the drug or the presence of a firearm. Simple possession of any quantity of powder cocaine by first-time offenders is considered a misdemeanor, punishable by no more than one year in prison but simple possession of crack cocaine results in a five-year mandatory sentence.(89) The average sentence for a first time, non-violent drug offender is longer than the average sentence for rape, child molestation, bank robbery or manslaughter.(90) While the intent was to punish high-level drug offenders, the laws have had the opposite effect-jailing low-level drug offenders for unusually long sentences. Enforcement agencies focus their efforts on those minor actors in the trade who are the most easily arrested, prosecuted, and penalized, rather than on the middle and high-level criminals who are drug dealing's true masterminds and profiteers who are able to trade information in return for significantly reduced prison sentences.
Before the sentencing guideline concept took root, however, state lawmakers began enacting mandatory minimum penalties for drugs. This began in 1973 with the passage of the notorious "Rockefeller drug laws" in New York (named after then Gov. Nelson Rockefeller) requiring mandatory 15-year prison sentences for sales of small amounts of narcotics.(91)
THE PRISON ECONOMY
By increasing rates of crime and incarceration, the U.S. Government has not only reduced living standards but has laid the foundations for the new coercion economy. The warning from past and present events is that private corporations can meet a substantial portion of their labour requirements through slave labour. There's nothing wrong with putting prisoners to work providing they are genuine criminals and basic human rights are upheld. However, in both Nazi Germany and modern day China, slave labourers were not criminals, they were enemies of the state or targets of genocide; they were ruthlessly abused, tortured and murdered. Private corporations were glad to use labour under these conditions. For this reason, the exponential growth of the U.S. prison population accompanied by a deterioration of civil liberties is cause for serious concern. Also, when prison labour starts to become significant, as it now is in China, that has a negative effect on wage and employment levels.
The number of inmates in state and federal prisons has increased more than six-fold from less than 200,000 in 1970 to 1,440,655 by the end 2002. An additional 665,475 are held in local jails. As of 30 June 2002, the nation's prison and jail population exceeded 2 million for the first time in history. At the end of 2002, 1 of every 143 Americans was incarcerated, the highest incarceration rate in the world. The number of persons on probation and parole has been growing dramatically along with institutional populations. There are now 6.7 million Americans incarcerated or on probation or parole, an increase of more than 265 percent since 1980.(92)
In the U.K. the prison population was about 45,000 in 1990. By 2009 it could be as high as 107,000 according to home office predictions.(93)
The 1979 U.S. Federal Prison Industries Enhancement Certification Program gave private industry the green light to put state and federal prison inmates to work. Major companies such as Texas Instruments, Honeywell, Hewlett-Packard, Siemens, Microsoft and Boeing sub-contract some low-end assembly work to prisons. They can pay the same or lower wages as they would in Mexico but can use the 'made in USA' label.(94) (95) In July 2003 Dell Computer Corp. was admonished by an environmental group for running a primitive recycling operation that exposed prisoners to toxic chemicals.(96)
NAZI SLAVE LABOUR
The use of slave labour by two major German industrial giants was scrutinized at the Nuremberg Trials. I.G. Farben had an estimated 83,000 slaves at its Auschwitz factory and Krupp industries use around 75,000 slaves. However the full scale of slave labour was brought to light in 1999 when The American Jewish Committee presented the results of their investigations.(97) Aware of this investigation, major companies employed their own historians to look for skeletons in their closets. Deutsche Bank's company historian discovered that it helped finance the construction of Auschwitz from which tens of thousands of slaves were taken.(98)
In February 1999 thirteen major corporations who used slave labour came clean and agreed to set up a compensation fund for the victims to head off law suits: Allianz AG, BASF AG, Bayer AG, BMW AG, DaimlerChrysler AG, Deutsche Bank AG, Degussa-Hüls AG, Dresdner Bank AG, Friedr. Krupp AG, Hoesch-Krupp, Hoechst AG, Siemens AG and Volkswagen AG. In December 1999, The American Jewish Committee produced a list of 257 companies that used slave labour. More than 50 companies on AJC's initial list of 257 firms, including multi-nationals Shell & DEA Oil GmbH, and Ford Motor Co, joined the general compensation fund. Ten days after the list was issued, negotiators agreed on a fund totaling $5.2 billion dollars. Professor Ulrich Herbert of, University of Freiburg, an expert on Nazi slave labour points out that the firms identified on the AJC list account for just a fraction of all German companies that used slave or forced labour. Indeed, virtually every industrial company of any size in Germany used slave or forced labour. The total number of slaves is estimated at 12 million. German historians estimate that of the thousands of companies that used forced and slave labour, more than 500 are still in operation.(99)(100)
The compensation fund is now called The German Economy Foundation Initiative, whose stated purpose is,
...guaranteeing that all German companies, including foreign affiliates and parent companies, will be protected against lawsuits relating to the Nazi era and that they will be able to work on international markets under conditions of comprehensive and lasting legal security.(101)
The Laogai Research Foundation is a non-profit organization dedicated to collecting information about China's vast system of forced-labour camps. The foundation was started by Hongda Harry Wu, who has written three books on his experiences as a Chinese prisoner for over 19 years. Currently, there are estimated eight million prisoners in China's slave labour camp system known as 'Laogai'. As a tool of political repression, the Laogai serves to silence all voices of political dissent throughout China. Once in the Laogai, inmates are forced to confess their "crimes," denounce any anti-Party beliefs and submit to a regime of reeducation and labour. Although Chinese law forbids torture and the use of torture to extract confessions, the practice remains widespread in the Laogai. Anyone in China can be held for up to three years in with no trial or sentencing procedure of any kind. All that is necessary is the directive of any official in China's Public Security Bureau. All prisoners in the Laogai are forced to labour. Labour conditions vary from region to region and camp to camp. There are many reports of prisoners working up to 16 to 18 hours a day to meet labour quotas that are enforced through withholding of food rations. Prisoners also often labour in highly unsafe conditions including work in mines and with toxic chemicals. Sometimes conditions are less arduous with more reasonable working hours and more humane treatment. Prisoners do not receive payment for their labour or any profit generated from the products they produce. According to documented evidence gathered by the Laogai Research Foundation and other human rights and media organizations, the practice of harvesting the organs of executed prisoners in China began sometime in the late 1970s. Organs harvested from prisoners are used in transplant operations for privileged Chinese and for foreigners. According to the statistics of Amnesty International, China executes more prisoners every year than the rest of the world combined.
The deliberate application of forced labour by the Chinese government has spawned an entirely new field in China's economy: the economics of slavery. One theorist clearly defined this policy in the following statement:
The fundamental task of our Laogai facilities is punishing and reforming criminals. To define their function concretely, they fulfill tasks in the following three ways: (1) Punishing criminals and putting them under surveillance; (2) Reforming criminals; (3) organizing criminals in labour and production, thus creating wealth for society. Our Laogai units are both facilities of dictatorship and special enterprises.
- Criminal Reform Handbook, PRC Ministry of Justice, Laogai Bureau,Shaanxi People's Publishers, 1988 (102)
Western companies are still using slave labour today on a huge scale by trading with China. The U.S. imports approximately $70 billion worth of Chinese goods.(103) The import of Chinese forced labour-made goods into the U.S. is illegal, according to section 1307 of the Tariff Act of 1930, which makes it is illegal to import any product that is produced in whole or in part by prison labour of any kind. In 1992, the need to directly confront the Chinese regarding this issue became apparent, leading to the signing of a document known as the "Memorandum of Understanding Between the United States of America and the People's Republic of China on Prohibiting Import and Export Trade in Prison Labor Products". In the most recent State Department Report on Human Rights from 1999, U.S. authorities admit that the MOU has been "nearly impossible" to enforce and that Chinese authorities have been "uncooperative. When a product is labeled "Made in China," it may hide the fact that it was made in the Laogai by Chinese prisoners. Until China reveals the extent of their Laogai production, and U.S. companies are willing to release the location of all of their manufacturing facilities in China, there is no way for the Western consumer to be certain that s/he is not financially contributing to the Laogai system.
Examples include Chrysler's joint venture in China to make Cherokees called Beijing Jeep Company and Volkswagen's joint venture in China to make the Santana model called Shanghai Volkswagen Automobile Company. The Laogai foundation investigation showed they were sourcing parts from prison labour.(104) The success of China's prison economy is evidenced by all the "made in China" toys in our shops. The China National Toy Association (CNTA) is actually a front for People's Armed Police (PAP) and the Chinese Army (PLA) Laogai system.(105)
Spending on health care in the U.S. is projected to rise from 14% of GDP (2000) ($1.42 trillion ), to 17% in 2011.(106) Total health care expenditure in the E.U. averages 8% of GDP. (107) The pharmaceutical companies are the major beneficiaries of disease as indicated by their market value. At the time of writing, Britain's GlaxoSmithKline was Britain's fourth largest company. Pfizer was America's fourth largest company and the fourth largest in the world. Novartis was Switzerland's largest company, 35% larger than second place Nestle. The world's top ten drug/healthcare companies had a total market value of $ 1.1 trillion (see chapter 2).
What we are witnessing is on the one hand is a form of indenture through illness, a pharmaceutical feudalism. As disease increases so does the tariff that society pays to the petrochemical sorcerers who provide symptomatic treatments and abuse their power over medical research to block any curative or preventative treatments. However the other Orwellian economic goal of public health policy is to make us poorer. Nothing illustrates this second point better than the emergence of extremely disabling new diseases during the 1980s which are described in the final chapter of this book. The economic consequences of Western public health policy are clear from the statistics of disability, unemployment and healthcare spending. The percentage of the population who are disabled is similar in Europe and the U.S.. In the E.U., disability is estimated to affect 10-20% of each country's population and the U.K. and U.S. both have 15% disabled.(108)(109) So much for the medical 'breakthroughs' of the twentieth century. In the U.K. 3.8 million disabled people of working age are out of work, 11% of the total 34 million of working age. In the U.S., 13 million disabled people of working age are out of work 8.5% of the total 159 million of working age. Incomes of households with at least one disabled person are 20-30% lower than the incomes of all households. For Federal Reserve Bank Chairman Paul Volcker and Co. who require a substantial decline in living standards in the West, these statistics represent success not failure of the healthcare system.
The dream of prosperity for all is dying out around the world. Developing countries which had an expanding middle class in the early 1980s have been ransacked. Almost 5 billion people on the planet do not have basic property rights enjoyed in the West. At the same time, Westerners are getting poorer year by year. In the U.K., the enormous increase in house prices has made home ownership an impossibility for most young people.
Chapter 7 End Notes
1. George Orwell, 1984, part 3 chapter 2. Full text available on-line at http://www.mondopolitico.com/library/1984/1984_c21.htm
2. Special Report: America
Celebrates Tax Freedom Day, The Tax Foundation, April 2003.
3. Jane Hough, The Burden of
Taxation, economic policy and statistics section, House of Commons
library,10 May 2001, ref. 01/51, appendix.
4. Technical Appendix, Tax
Freedom Day website.
5. How The UK Compares, Tax Freedom Day website. See http://www.taxfreedomday.co.uk/uk-compares.htm
6. New Study Profiles Total Tax
Burden of Median American Family, The Tax Foundation, 9 March 2000
7. Jane Hough op cit., p.21 Table 4
8. Dean Stansel, The Hidden Burden Of Taxation: How the Government Reduces Take-Home Pay, Cato Policy Analysis No 302, 15 April 1998. See http://www.cato.org/pubs/pas/pa-302.html
9. Isabelle Joumard, Tax systems
in European Union Countries, OECD, economics department working papers No.
301, 29 June 2001, ref ECO/WKP(2001)27 pp.10-16. See
10. Alan Greenspan, Gold and Economic Freedom, The Objectivist,1966. See http://www.gold-eagle.com/greenspan041998.html
11. Ron Paul, Congressman, speech in the House, Money as a Moral Issue, Paper Money and Tyranny, 5 September 2003. See http://www.house.gov/paul/congrec/congrec2003/cr090503.htm
12. G. Edward Griffin, The Creature from Jekyll Island, American Media, Fourth Edition, 2002, Ch. 3
13. Ibid., pp.116 and 120
14. Ibid., p.115
15. Ibid. pp116-119
16. Joseph Stiglitz, Globalization and its Discontents, Penguin Books, 2002, p.95
17. 2003 World Development
Indicators, The World Bank, 4.16 External Debt, pp 246 -249. See
18. Today's Conditions, Ron
Paul op cit.
19. U.S. Inflation Rates, Simple and User Friendly Calculator-Database Applications, Russell Software Inc. See. http://www.russellsoftware.com/inflarates.htm
20. Joe Hicks & Grahame Allen, A
Century of Change:Trends in UK Statistics since 1900, social and general
statistics section, House of Commons library, ref. 99/111, 21 Dec.1999.
21. Sliglitz, op cit., p109
22. Ibid., pp.116-117
23. World Bank Secret Documents Consumes Argentina: Alex Jones Interviews Greg Palast,
4 March 2002. Transcript at Greg
Palast's website. See
24. Stiglitz, op cit., p.122
25. Griffin, op cit., Ch 23
26. Ibid., p.487
27. Rate rise forecast prompts
debt warning, BBC, London, 6 November 2003. See
28. W.T.O. website.
29. Sir James Goldsmith, The New
Utopia: GATT and Global Free Trade, Federal Document Clearing House
Senate Commerce GATT Implementation, 5 October 1994. See
30. Robert E. Scott, NAFTA's
Hidden Costs: Trade agreement results in job losses,
growing inequality, and wage suppression for the United States, Economic
Policy Institute, April 2001.
31. Dean Baker and Mark Weisbrot, Will
new trade gains make us rich? An assessment of the prospective gains from new
trade agreements, Center for Economic Policy and Policy Research
3 October 2001.
32. Long queue at drive-in soup kitchen, A Special Report, The Guardian, London, 3 November 2003. See http://www.guardian.co.uk/uselections2004/story/0,13918,1076608,00.html
33. Philipp Harper, Will your job
move to India?, MSNBC Money Central, 30 Sept 2003. See
34. Michelle Kessler and Stephanie
Armour, Increasing export of white-collar jobs is cause for concern, USA
Today, 10 August 2003. See copy on the website of The Salt Lake Tribune
35. Anger as HSBC cuts 4,000 UK jobs, BBC, London, 17 October 2003. See http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/business/3199598.stm
36. Immigrant Population Climbs
to 33 Million, Federation for American Immigration reform website, October
37. Immigration's Impact on the
U.S, op cit..
38. John McAuley, Immigrants Keep U.S. Economy Supple, Minnesota Star Tribune, 4 Sept. 2002. See copy on Numbers USA website http://www.numbersusa.com/text?ID=1259
39. Anthony Browne, Cost of the
migration revolution, The Times, London, 01 March 2003.
40. Lower Wages for American
Workers, Federation for American Immigration Reform (F.A.I.R.),October
41. National Academy of Sciences
Immigration Study, F.A.I.R., October 1997.
42. David Barboza, 'Meatpackers'
Profile Hinges on Pool of Immigrant Labor'
New York Times, 21 December 2001.
See copy on Numbers USA website http://www.numbersusa.com/text?ID=885
43. High-tech worker visas, Numbers
USA website, 2003
44. Brian Grow with Manjeet
Kripalani, A Visa Loophole as Big as a Mainframe, BusinessWeek,
10 March 2003. See
45. Deleting American Workers:
Abuse of the Temporary Foreign Worker System in the High Tech Industry. Federation
for American Immigration reform website, 2003. See
46. Why Amnesty Isn't the
Solution, F.A.I.R. See
47. Robert L. Bartley, Open Nafta Borders? Why Not?, The Wall St Journal Editorial Page, 2 July 2001. See http://www.opinionjournal.com/columnists/rbartley/?id=95000738
48. Dane Schiller and Guillermo X.
Garcia, Fox feels buoyed by U.S. visit, San Antonio Express-News , 7
November 2003. See http://news.mysanantonio.com/
49. Dan Stein, Why Legalization Programs for Illegal Aliens Won't Solve the Problem, 17 October 2003, F.A.I.R. See http://www.fairus.org/Media/Media.cfm?ID=2253&c=35
50. Who Are We? Migration
Watch UK website.
51. Ibid., Key Points:Is there a
52. EU enlargement, E.U.
53. Steve Schifferes, Who gains
from immigration? BBC, London, 17 June 2002. See
54. An overview of UK migration, Migration
Watch UK. See
55. Anthony Browne, op cit.,
57. Sir Andrew Green, Government
grasping at straws to justify immigration policy, The Daily Telegraph,
London, 22 September 2003. See copy on the website of Migration Watch UK
58. Green Cross International,
founded by Mikhail Gorbachev. See
59.Dr Michael Coffman, Why
Property Rights Matter, pp.13-14
Short Version http://www.discerningtoday.org/PropertyRights2.pdf
See also http://www.ega.org/
60. Earth Charter Initiative,
Newsflash, July 2000. See
http://www.earthcharter.org/news/index.cfm?id_activity=445&actual=0 and http://www.earthcharter.org/innerpg.cfm?id_page=93
61. Coffman, op cit.,
62. The Turner Foundation. See
63. NationMaster.com encyclopedia.
64. About WWF, WWF website.
65. Interview with Prince Philip,
Alliance of Religions and Conservations website. See
66. Who are we and what do we
stand for? International Business Leaders Forum website.
67. Coffman op cit., p8
68 Dr Michael Coffman, Globalizing Mining in America, Mining Voice Magazine Volume 6(2):26-35. See http://www.discerningtoday.org/globalizing_america.htm
69. Joan M Veon, Tyranny by
Another Name - Protecting the Environment. See
70. Coffman op cit.,
71. Monte Burke and William P. Barrett, This Land Is My Land, Forbes Magazine, 6 October 2003. See http://www.forbes.com/free_forbes/2003/1006/050.html
72. Dr Michael Coffman, The Smart
Growth Fraud, NewsWithViews.com, 15 July 2003.See
73. Wendell Cox, Forfeiting the
American Dream: The HUD-Funded Smart Growth Guidebook's Attack on
Homeownership, Backgrounder #1565, The Heritage Foundation, 2 July 2002.
74. Concepts, Instruments for Change, International Institute for Sustainable Development, Canada. See http://www.iisd.org/susprod/principles.htm
75. 1994 Declaration of The Factor
Ten Club. See
76. Joan Veon, op cit.
77. Public Private Partnership for the Urban Environment, UN Department of Social and Economic Affairs, Division for Sustainable Development. See http://www.unece.org/operact/ppp/introduction.htm
78. Mission, Strategy and distinguishing characteristics, International Business Leaders Forum. See http://www.iblf.org/csr/csrwebassist.nsf/content/f1a2a3.html
79. Global Warming Petition,
Oregon Institute for Science and Medicine. See
80. James A. Paul and Katarina
Wahlberg, Global Taxes for Global Priorities, Global Policy Forum and
the Heinrich Böll Foundation, March 2002
81. Rebuilding America's Defenses, Project For the New American Century, 2000. See
82. David Anderson, The Aggregate Burden of Crime, Journal of Law and Economics, January 1999. See http://papers.ssrn.com/sol3/papers.cfm?abstract_id=147911 and synopsis at David A Anderson http://www.argmax.com/mt_blog/archive/000260.php
83. The Economic Costs of Drug
Abuse in The United States 1992-1998, Executive Office of the President,
Office of National Drug Control Policy,Washington, D.C. 20503, September 2001.
84. Lisa Ronthal, CIA admits drug trafficking, cover-up, WorldNetDaily.com, 27 Oct.1998. See http://www.worldnetdaily.com/news/article.asp?ARTICLE_ID=20384
85. Allegations of connections
between CIA and the Contras in cocaine trafficking to the United States: Report
by The CIA Inspector General.(96-0143-IG). See
86. The CIA and drugs, See http://ciadrugs.homestead.com/files/outline.html#intro
87. Drugs and Crime Facts,
U.S. Dept. of Justice, Bureau of Justice Statistics. See
88. Economic Consequences of the
War on Drugs, The Drug Policy Alliance. See
89. Crack Vs Powder Cocaine
Sentencing, Families against Mandatory Minimums.
90. Mandatory Sentencing, The
Drug Policy Alliance. See http://www.drugpolicy.org/library/
91. History of Mandatory Sentences, Families against Mandatory Minimums. See http://www.famm.org/si_history_of_mandatory.htm
92. Drug Policy and The Criminal Justice System, 2001, The Sentencing Project, Washington D.C. See http://www.sentencingproject.org/pdfs/1035.pdf
93. Rachel Councell and John Simes, Projections
of long term trends in the prison population to 2009 England and Wales,
Home Office, 9 Dec. 2002. See
94. Jennifer Sullivan, Made on the Inside for Use on the Outside, Wired News, 02 Dec. 1997. See http://www.wired.com/news/business/0,1367,8867,00.html
95. Slavery With a New Name, Prison Activist Resource Center, California. See http://prisonactivist.org/factsheets/pic.pdf
96. David Koenig, Dell drops
recycling company that used prison labor, San Francisco Chronicle, 03 July
97. American Jewish Committee. See http://www.ajc.org/
98. Thane Peterson and Joan Warner Holocaust
Reparations: German CEOs Unlock Their Vaults, Business Week Online, 22 Feb
99. Carol J. Williams, Corporate
Profit: Fortune 500 Companies Profit from Nazi Slave Labor,
Los Angeles Times, 8 December 1999.
See copy at http://www.worldfreeinternet.net/news/nws187.htm
101. Members, German Economy
Foundation Initiative Steering Group.
See Members http://www.stiftungsinitiative.de/eindex.html
102. FAQ's, The Laogai
103. Congressman Sherrod Brown,
Brown wins house approval of measure enforcing ban on goods made with slave
labor, Press Release,13 July 2000.
104. Immoral and Illegal, The
Laogai Research Foundation, Case #2: Shanxi Province Number 3 Prison (also known
as Shanxi Linfen Automobile Manufacturing Plant). See
105. Charles Smith, GI Joe and the Chinese slave trade, WorldNetDaily.com, 8 Sept 1998. See http://www.worldnetdaily.com/news/article.asp?ARTICLE_ID=20477
106. Marc Leduc, Healing
107. Bringing mental health
issues into the mainstream of a health-conscious society,
Health and Consumer Protection Directorate-General, EU Commission Press Release, Brussels, 6 April 2001. See http://europa.eu.int/
108. Disability: Some Facts,
Employer's Forum on Disability. See
109. Andrew Houtenville,
Disability & Employment in the USA: National Overview based on 2000 Census,
Disability World. See
8.1 THE FUTURE OF DEMOCRACY
The socio-economic structure of the New World Order is a world of 'have mores' and 'have nothings', with virtually no middle class beyond the few useful but expendable hatchet men. The descent into neo-feudalism also necessitates political disenfranchisement and legal alienation, i.e. the rewinding of a thousand years of historical progress towards freedom and democracy.
Is there really a plan for world government of this nature or is this just conspiracy theory? Vladimir Bukovsky's classified Politburo documents reveal that, in the years leading up to the collapse of the Soviet Union, Gorbachev was meeting with European socialist leaders and the international financial elite, discussing the convergence of Soviet states with the new European state. Speaking in private with Argentine President Carlos Menem on 25th October 1990, Gorbachev said:
One of my aides has written sometime ago that we need to create a world government. People were laughing at him at that time. But now?
C. Menem. Some 40 years ago, Peron was speaking of continentalism which would enable us to go for a world government.
M. Gorbachev. I believe we should think about enhancing the UN role. It could not realise its potential for 40 years and only now did it get such an opportunity. Here is a proto-type of the world government for you.
Mr Bukovsky's experience of socialism leads him to believe that there is no limit to the expansionist plans of the E.U.. Romano Prodi has already drawn up a map of the sphere of E.U. interests which includes the whole of the Middle East, North Africa and Turkey. The dreams of the financial elite and the Socialist International are one and the same, because, as Bukovsky reflects, 'no utopia has ever worked in a limited space, be it a village, a town, a continent or a planet'.
Of course none of this could be done openly, which is why the Russians quickly sealed the Politburo archives again. It is being accomplished using the socialist tactic of incrementalism. The U.N., with its gentle light blue emblem, is presented to the public as an institution of peace and social justice, serving as the sheep's clothing for the pack of wolves who sponsor it. Whilst the U.N. is still largely a fig leaf for one-world government, real political power blocs are being constructed on the basis of this cosy 'big idea'. Americans would be well advised to look at the E.U. to appreciate just how cosy this big idea isn't.The differences between the Anglo-American political tradition and the principles underpinning the European Union were recently summarized by Ashley Mote, Member of the European Parliament and author of Vigilance: A Defence of British Liberty.
Traditionally, in the U.K. and the U.S., the state draws its power from, and is answerable to the people. In the E.U., the state exists in its own right and the people answer to it. A significant example of this shift of philosophy can be seem in the announcement of a new mission statement for Britain's gigantic tax collection and welfare agency, the Inland Revenue, proudly displayed on the homepage at www.inlandrevenue.gov.uk:
The Inland Revenue is here to ensure that everyone understands and receives what they are entitled to and understands and pays what they owe, so that everyone contributes to the UK's needs.
'so that everyone contributes to the UK's needs'? Are they suggesting that British citizens exist to serve the state? What happens if one chooses not to 'contribute' to the U.K.'s needs and who defines how one should 'contribute'?
In the U.K. and U.S., our rights and freedoms are our birth right. In the E.U., there are no rights or freedoms , only privileges that can be withdrawn.
In the U.K. and U.S., no man is above the law. In the E.U., the bureaucrats have given themselves immunity from prosecution.
In the U.K. and U.S., the Government can be replaced by the people every few years. In the E.U., the governing Commission is not elected by the people or the European Parliament, it is appointed by the heads of member states.
In the U.K. and U.S., everything is allowed unless specifically forbidden. In the E.U. everything is implicitly forbidden unless the E.U. decides to allow it.
These principles are firmly embedded in the political organization of the European Union. Although there is notionally a separation of powers between the Executive and Legislature, in reality power is firmly in the hands of the Executive. The 25 Commissioners who constitute the government of the E.U. are not Members of the European Parliament (MEPs) but are appointed every five years by a qualified majority of the heads of each member state in the European Council. Although the Parliament has to approve the appointment of the Commission, and it can by two-thirds majority vote to sack it, it cannot approve or reject the appointment of individual Commissioners or sack them individually. A 'motion of censure' has never achieved the necessary majority, and if it ever did, the Parliament would not have the power to appoint a new Commission. In 1999, Neil Kinnock was a member of the Santer Commission which was forced to resign because of serious financial corruption. Mr Kinnock was appointed to the replacement Commission as Commissioner in charge of tackling E.U. fraud!
Jeffrey Titford, MEP for the Eastern Region and member of the U.K. Independence Party (UKIP), was one of many MEPs dismayed by certain appointments to the new Commission in January 2005:
When my colleague Nigel Farage MEP recently rose to his feet in the European Parliament and denounced the new European Commission, he was vilified and threatened with legal action. Mr Farage had asked fellow MEPs whether they would ‘buy a used car from this man’, when he revealed that M. Jacques Barrot, had received an 8 month suspended sentence and was barred from elected office in France for 2 years, after being convicted in 2000 of embezzling FFR 25m (US$ 3.8m) from government funds by diverting it into the coffers of his party.
Britain has an equally impressive representative in the person of Peter Mandelson, selected by Tony Blair and duly appointed in January 2005 as Commissioner for Trade. He was forced to resign not once, but twice from Blair's Government due to allegations of corruption. In December 1998, it was revealed that Mandelson had bought a home in Notting Hill in 1996 with the assistance of an interest-free indefinite loan of £373,000 from Geoffrey Robinson, a millionaire Labour MP who was also in the Government but was subject to an inquiry into his business dealings by the Department of Trade and Industry which Mandelson headed. Out of office for only ten months, he was re-appointed Secretary of State for Northern Ireland, in October1999. On 21 January 2001, Mr Mandelson resigned again after it was discovered that, whilst he was managing the Millenium Dome Project, he had phoned the Home Office on behalf of Srichanda Hinduja, an Indian businessman who was seeking British citizenship. Mr Hinduja had offered £1 million to the failing Dome project. With a track record like this, Mandelson was destined for a top job in Brussels.
Under the 1957 Treaty of Rome, the E.U. Commission has the exclusive right to draft legislation meaning that the Parliament cannot initiate legislation or repeal it. The Commission also has the right to 'its own power of decision' as the 'guardian of the Treaties' allowing it to issue its own Regulations as, for example, to enforce the Common Agricultural and Fisheries Policies. Unlike Directives, Regulations immediately become law as soon as they have gone through the European Parliament and do not have to be ratified by the national parliaments of member states.
However, under the consultation procedure there are major areas of E.U. legislation over which the European Parliament has no power at all. The only legal requirement is that Parliament states its opinion on proposed legislation. The E.U.'s fact sheet entitled 'Decision Making in the European Union' describes this in more depth. (See http://europa.eu.int/institutions/decision-making/index_en.htm)
There are three main procedures for enacting new EU laws:
The main difference between them is the way Parliament interacts with the Council [of Ministers]. Under the consultation procedure, Parliament merely gives its opinion [emphasis added]; under the codecision procedure, Parliament genuinely shares power with the Council. The European Commission, when proposing a new law, must choose which procedure to follow. The choice will, in principle, depend on the "legal basis" of the proposal....
.... The areas covered by the consultation procedure are:
and judicial cooperation in criminal matters
Revision of the Treaties
Discrimination on grounds of sex, race or ethnic origin, religion or political conviction, disability, age or sexual orientation
Visas, asylum, immigration and other policies associated with the free movement of persons
Transport (where it is likely to have a significant impact on certain regions)
"Enhanced co-operation" - i.e. the arrangement allowing a group of member states to work together in a particular field even if the others do not wish to join in yet.
Even where the Commission sends legislation to both the Council of Ministers and the Parliament under 'codecision' procedure, the volume of Directives and Regulations coming down from the Commission is so large that MEPs do not even have time to read much of the legislation. Because they often haven't got a clue what they are voting on, MEPs rely on civil servants to tell them how to vote. Current British MEP Nigel Farage stated that on one occasion, MEPs were required to vote on Directives 450 times in one 80-minute session. He freely admitted that it was a farce and he voted as he was told.1 Again, in a BBC interview he said:
For example, I'm told that on 21 July - the second day of this particular session - that I'm going to be asked to vote on up to 500 motions in a morning with my electronic voting pad. It seems to me that that's just impossible.2
The Lord's prayer contains 70 words, the Ten Commandments 297, the American Declaration of Independence 300 and the Common Market Directive on the export of duck eggs 26,911. Over 23,000 EU legal acts are in force and around one third of British law now originates in Brussels.3
Finally, the European Parliament cannot even be called a talking shop. MEPs in the smaller political groups are very lucky if they are given two 90 second slots a week to speak in a debate. Informed, in-depth discussion, therefore, does not exist within the European Parliament.4 In Britain, detailed transcripts are recorded of Parliamentary matters and published for all to see (Hansard). In the E.U., few of the proceedings are generally recorded or even made available for public scrutiny. A search for the word 'minutes' on the useful E.U. dictionary www.EUABC.com, revealed that, unlike other central banks,The European Central Bank refuses to publish the minutes of its meetings. The dictionary also introduces a new world 'comitology' to describe the work and study of the many committees and working groups in the E.U. A Swedish scientist has found approximately 1350 active working groups in the Commission most of which operate without the full oversight of MEPs who cannot even get the lists of names of the participants.
The corruption in the Brussels bureaucracy is discussed in more depth in chapter 11,'the legal apparatus of totalitarianism'.
Recent events in the U.S. demonstrate why electronic voting is the modus operandi of the European Parliament and the future of democracy under global feudalism: its designed for fraud. Electronic touch screen voting is being rolled out across the U.S. using software that does not permit any physical auditing or vote counting, permits casting of multiple votes and can be remotely accessed in order to change the election result. How could the public be persuaded to accept this? Remember the 2000 election: After the debacle in Florida (and actually in plenty of other locations around the U.S.), with its hanging chads and pregnant chads and other punch-card problems, Congress passed the Help America Vote Act in 2002. One of the functions of the new law was to provide $4 billion for states to use in updating their often antiquated voting equipment. With federal money available, and the cautionary story of Florida as a warning, states began turning in droves to electronic voting machines. This is the classical 'problem-reaction-solution' tactics of the wolf in sheep's clothing.5
The company at the centre of the controversy is Diebold Election Systems Inc. of Ohio who have sold 33,000 touch screen voting machines in the United States. Diebold donated at least $195,000 to the Republican Party between 2000 and 2002, and its CEO Walden O'Dell once pledged to "deliver" Ohio's electoral votes for President Bush.6
In Georgia during the 2002 elections, some voters using Diebold machines tried to vote for one candidate, but the machine would instead register a vote for the opponent. There were six electoral upsets in that election, including one in which the incumbent senator, who was far ahead in the polls, lost by 11 points. Diebold had changed the software used by the voting machines seven or eight times, without anyone examining it, and then after the election the company immediately overwrote the flash memory of all the cards used by those machines, so it is now impossible to know what the vote counts really were.7
Researchers at Johns Hopkins University and Rice University said they had uncovered bugs in a Diebold Inc. voting system that could allow voters and poll workers to cast multiple ballots, switch others' votes, or shut down an election early. Encryption of sensitive data is absent: Diebold doesn't encrypt vote totals before they are transferred to the Board of Elections over the Internet allowing outsiders to reach into the system and change election tallies. A lack of oversight in the development process could allow programmers to create secret "back doors" for tampering as well. Diebold's source code is kept secret. Voters do not get a paper receipt of their vote.8,9,10
This information only came to public attention because in March 2003, someone hacked into a web-server used by Diebold and copied thousands of messages posted to an online discussion board used internally by Diebold employees to discuss its voting machines, as well as actual code used in the voting machines. In August 2003, the documents were sent to journalists and the story became mainstream.11 Diebold responded by threatening legal action for copyright infringement demanding that the offending material be removed from internet sites. Computer programmers, ISPs and students at 20 universities, including the University of California at Berkeley and the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, received cease and decist letters. Unfortunately for Diebold, the files are now on servers all over the world. Congressman Dennis Kucinich and Democratic Presidential candidate has taken up the campaign against Diebold, posting the documents on his website.12
In response to these revelations, in August, the Governor of Maryland ordered a third-party audit of the software of Diebold's touch-screen voting machines. Maryland was the first state to adopt a unified electronic voting system statewide. Just days before the university report came out, Maryland awarded Diebold a $55.6 million contract to provide and service 11,000 additional Diebold machines to be used throughout the state for the 2004 presidential primary.13The State of California is investigating claims that Diebold illegally inserted software in to the machines in the San Francisco Bay area after they had been publicly certified.14
In the wake of concerns raised about security flaws in electronic voting systems, a lobbying group is mounting a public relations and lobbying campaign to help voting companies "repair short-term damage done by negative reports and media coverage" instead of addressing the problem, further indicating that the problem is by design not by accident.15
The British Government is planning to introduce electronic voting in the UK. The initiative has come from the Office of The Deputy Prime Minister, the same department responsible for breaking up the country up into regions, as discussed below. 16
8.2 BANNING OPPOSITION TO WORLD GOVERNMENT
Don't be surprised when in 2005 you read on the front page of the newspaper, 'It's Official: Britain is Illegal '. Human Rights legislation is designed to outlaw opposition to world government. Any statement or action which opposes world government and supports the nation state will be a crime of "racism" or " xenophobia". If the E.U. Framework decision on combating racism and xenophobia becomes law or even more disastrously the U.N.'s Model National Legislation for the Guidance of Governments in the Enactment of Further Legislation Against Racial Discrimination, we will not legally be able to oppose the dismantling of nation states and creation of world government.
The 1986 Public Order Act, made it a criminal offence to actively stir up racial hatred. The definition of race includes national origins.
E.U. laws against the nation state began with article 14 of the 1950 European Convention for the Protection of Human Rights and Fundamental Freedoms. The latest amendment to the convention, Protocol No 12, 4th November 2000 reads:
Article 1 - General prohibition of discrimination
· 1 The enjoyment of any right set forth by law shall be secured without discrimination on any ground such as sex, race, colour, language, religion, political or other opinion, national or social origin, association with a national minority, property, birth or other status.
· 2 No one shall be discriminated against by any public authority on any ground such as those mentioned in paragraph 1.17 [emphasis added]
The law is now administered by the European Commission against Racism and Intolerance (ECRI) set up by a Council of Europe summit held in Vienna in October 1993. It was strengthened by a second summit held in Strasbourg in October 1997. ECRI's task is to combat racism, xenophobia, antisemitism and intolerance.18 In 1997, the European Monitoring Centre on Racism and Xenophobia (EUMC) was established to serve as the watchdog and think-tank for the ECRI.19
Religious hatred, xenophobia and racism are not yet crimes under British law.20 However, the E.U. Additional Protocol to the Convention on Cybercrime, concerning the criminalization of acts of a racist and xenophobic nature committed through computer systems, ratified by 11 countries in November 2002, requires nation states to criminalize dissemination of racist and xenophobic on the internet. As discussed in chapter 11, the new European Arrest Warrant makes Xenophobia and Racism two of 32 offences for which British citizens can be extradited to E.U. countries in which they are crimes. This prevents UK citizens expressing anti-globalist views on the internet because can they can be read in a country which outlaws "hate speech."21,22,23
Worse still, the pending Framework decision on combating racism and xenophobia aims to make xenophobia and racism criminal offences in Britain and all other European countries. The crimes include:
public dissemination or distribution of tracts, pictures or other material containing expressions of racism and xenophobia; directing of a racist or xenophobic group (by "group" is meant a structured organization consisting of at least two persons established for a specific period).... 5. Instigating, aiding, abetting or attempting to commit the above offences will also be punishable.....10. Member States will take the necessary measures to implement this framework decision by 30 June 2004.24
THE AMERICAN UNION
The Organization of American States was founded in 1948, and now includes all 35 independent countries of the Americas. Its purpose is the same as the E.U., a federal super-state, though politicians will never admit to that. 25 Like the E.U. it is not a popular idea, at least in the Northern hemisphere which has most to lose, therefore opposition to it is being made illegal under the guise of protecting human rights.
Article 1 of The American Convention on Human Rights 1969, reads:
The States Parties to this Convention undertake to respect the rights and freedoms recognized herein and to ensure to all persons subject to their jurisdiction the free and full exercise of those rights and freedoms, without any discrimination for reasons of race,color, sex, language, religion, political or other opinion, national or social origin, economic status, birth, or any other social condition.26[emphasis added]
The 1988 San Salvador Protocol reads:
The State Parties to this Protocol undertake to guarantee the exercise of the rights set forth herein without discrimination of any kind for reasons related to race, color, sex, language, religion, political or other opinions, national or social origin, economic status, birth or any other social condition.
The rights guaranteed under the Protocol include the right to work, healthcare, social security and education.27
The policy documents of the U.N.'s Office of The High Commissioner for Human Rights, Committee for the Elimination of Racism, Xenophobia and Related Intolerance, make it absolutely clear that criticism of world government public and private, will be illegal. The Model National Legislation for the Guidance of Governments in the Enactment of Further Legislation Against Racial Discrimination actually changes the meaning of the word racism to include xenophobia in true Orwellian Newspeak. Xenophobia, patriotism or nationalism are the same as racism according to the U.N. 28
2. In this Act, racial discrimination shall mean any distinction, exclusion, restriction, preference or omission based on race, colour, descent, nationality or ethnic origin which has the purpose or effect of nullifying or impairing, directly or indirectly, the recognition, equal enjoyment or exercise of human rights and fundamental freedoms recognized in international law.
CRITICISM OF WORLD GOVERNMENT WILL BE ILLEGAL
. Under this Act and in accordance with international law, the freedom of opinion and expression and the freedom of peaceful assembly and association shall be subject to the following restrictions: 23. It shall be an offence to threaten, insult, ridicule or otherwise abuse a person or group of persons by words or behaviour which cause or may reasonably be interpreted as an attempt to cause racial discrimination or racial hatred, or to incite a person or group of persons to do so.
PUTTING A LINK ON YOUR WEBSITE TO ANOTHER WEBSITE CRITICAL OF WORLD GOVERNMENT WILL BE ILLEGAL
26. It is an offence to disseminate or cause to be disseminated, in a publication, broadcast, exhibition or by any other means of social communication, any material that expresses or implies ideas or theories with the objective of incitement to racial discrimination.
TELLING YOUR FRIENDS AND FAMILY THAT WORLD GOVERNMENT IS A BAD IDEA WILL BE ILLEGAL
27. The actions referred to in paragraphs 23 to 25 of this Section are deemed to constitute an offence irrespective of whether they were committed in public or in private.
28. An action which occurs inside a private dwelling and is witnessed only by one or more persons present in that dwelling shall not constitute an offence.
NATIONAL POLITICAL PARTIES AND GOVERNMENTS WILL BE ILLEGAL
30. Any organization which undertakes to promote, incite, propagate or organize racial discrimination against an individual or group of individuals shall be declared illegal and prohibited. Under section 8 (c), punishment of offenders includes suspension of the right to be elected to a public office.
It's worth interjecting at this point that the E.U.'s constitutional affairs committee have been chewing over a draft "Statute of European Political Parties". The establishment of state-funded pan-European parties is something that federalists desperately want. If a majority of MEPs were to decide that a party was not abiding by their definition of human rights and democratic values, it would be debarred. This was precisely the ruse used across the Warsaw Pact. Parties were initially proscribed on grounds of being fascist, and, before long, this definition came to apply to everyone except the communists and their Peasant Party allies.29
NATIONAL BORDERS WILL BE ABOLISHED
36. It is an offence for any official or other servant of the State, or of a public establishment, national enterprise or a legal entity receiving financial assistance from the public authorities, to deny an individual or group of individuals access to a right, privilege or benefit on racial grounds. 37. It is an offence, on racial grounds: (a) To refuse to employ or refrain from employing an individual or group of individuals for a vacant post for which the persons concerned are qualified.
According to The Daily Telegraph, the first judicial ruling equating xenophobia with opposition to world government has already been made:
Is Euro-sceptic dissent xenophobic? I ask the question only half in jest, because the EU institutions have a habit of outdoing parody. The Advocate General of the European Court of Justice issued an opinion on October 19 - Case C-274/99 P - arguing that political criticism of the E.U. can be akin to blasphemy, and can therefore be restricted. He denies it. Read the case for yourself - in Spanish or French; English is not provided. He misuses a blasphemy case, Wingrove v United Kingdom, as a building block in arguing for repressive powers to limit free speech.30
The thought police are already active in Britain. In January 2003, Robin Page, former presenter of TV's One Man and his Dog and Daily Telegraph columnist, was questioned by police after saying country dwellers should enjoy the same rights as blacks, Muslims and homosexuals. Mr Page, was arrested on suspicion of stirring up racial hatred after making a speech at a pro-hunting rally in November which began: "If there is a black, vegetarian, Muslim, asylum-seeking, one-legged, lesbian lorry driver present…I want the same rights as you."31
8.3 CREATING REGIONAL GOVERNMENTS
The political structure of the U.N global government will be built through regionalism, also known as federalism. Nation states will be broken down into smaller regions and subsumed by larger international power blocs, just as the world was divided into Oceania, Eurasia and Eastasia in Orwell's 1984, and into ten regions in Huxley's Brave New World. The E.U. super-state is almost complete and it is the model for the Organization of American States. The purpose of regionalism is to circumvent national government and to centralize power under the U.N.
Within the E.U. there are, at present, 111 separate regions. In many of the continental countries a form of regional government has been common for decades, especially in France, Germany, Spain, and Italy. Article 198 a of The Maastricht Treaty 1992 32 set up The Committee Of The Regions and since then, the U.K. government has followed this agenda to break down the political structure of the U.K. so the smaller pieces can be made accountable to Brussels rather than Westminster. Northern Ireland, Scotland and Wales now have their own regional assemblies and soon England will be broken up into nine regions, making twelve U.K. regions in total. Already, in all twelve regions, Government Offices, Regional Development Agencies and Regional Assemblies have been set up with non-elected members, appointed to sit.33,34Referendums to set up elected assemblies in England will be held in Autumn 2004.35 It is clear that British sovereignty is to be completely surrendered to the E.U.
8.4 WORLD GOVERNMENT OR WORLD WAR THREE
The following predictions are based on current trends as they unfold and on an understanding of the policy objectives of the elite. These predictions are widely shared by students of the New World Order.
National borders are ultimately defined by military competence. All of the U.N. edicts and conventions mean nothing unless they can be enforced militarily upon recalcitrant nations. The E.U. super-state will acquire its necessary army through incrementalism, sometimes referred to as the "ratchet" system since their is no mechanism for repealing E.U. laws. However the massive geo-political restructuring needed to get all nations under a world army will require something quite spectacular. Think-tanks, university grants and bribes are not enough to bring about global government. The league of Nations and the United Nations were forged from the heat of the first and second world wars. Global government will be the fall-out from World War III. There is a three pronged strategy being played out, masquerading as the Global War on Terror. Firstly, America's super-power status will be destroyed. This will partly be achieved in carrying out the second tactic which is to bring uncooperative nations, especially those in the Middle East, under U.N. control. America's military might will be exhausted by invading Third World nations and setting up U.N. protectorates. Thirdly, threatened or actual conflict between nuclear powers will persuade all nations to surrender their military power to the U.N. thereby permanently relinquishing their sovereignty. This is why the West has given nuclear technology to North Korea and China. At this point, before hundreds of cities are annihilated ,there will be an emergency U.N. conference. The agreement reached will be to surrender control all weapons of mass destruction to a U.N. agency. The submission of all conventional armed forces to U.N command will follow. Eventually all military forces will be U.N. 'Peace Keeping' forces, whose purpose is to enforce the U.N. hegemony over rogue states.
If this sounds a little fantastic, consider this: NATO exercises for enforcing U.N. embargoes on breakaway states have already begun. The first exercise of NATO'S Response Force took place between 11th and 26th September 2003 in Galloway, Scotland. This was a 'crisis response' operation called 'Exercise Northern Lights' in which the mission was enforcing a U.N. arms embargo on a recently formed country. 36
A second exercise took place in Turkey on 20th November 2003. According to the NATO website, "the forces rescued and evacuated the U.N. staff and civilians, established an embargo, engaged in counter-terrorist operations and a show of force".37
Like American and European politicians, the Russians and Chinese oligarchs are happy to play their part in this farce because they also dream of international governance. Former party bosses are happy to assume the new role of 'World Controllers' in the eastern regions of the Brave New World. The neo-conservative government in the Whitehouse, like almost all previous administrations, is 100% committed to the globalist plan to destroy the independence of the U.S.. Once completed, the Donald Rumsfeld-initiated NATO Response Force will put the boot behind the imperial decrees the Death Star wishes to impose on rebel colonies.
The policy of weakening the U.S. military really began in earnest under Bush Sr. during the first Gulf War. 300,000 of the 700,000 troops deployed in Gulf War are now seriously ill with Gulf War Illness.38 They are being denied cheap and effective medical care for no apparent reason. Former Consultant to the Defense Department, Dr Garth Nicolson, estimates that at least 25,000 have died since the war ended. The others face permanent disability and destitution. Major Doug Rokke was the U.S. Army's depleted uranium project director in 1994-95 who has since campaigned tirelessly to expose the devastating health effects of DU munitions. The report he has obtained from the U.S. Veterans Administration states that, by August 2004, it had awarded permanent disability compensation to almost 280,000 U.S. troops who served in the Gulf region between August 1990 and May 2004. 39 Meanwhile, the Veterans Administration refuses to acknowledge that there is a Gulf War Illness, preferring to diagnose post-traumatic stress disorder.40 The cause of Gulf War Illness is multi-faceted, invariably linked to depleted uranium munitions, experimental vaccinations and exposure to chemical and biological weapons. All of these factors lead back to the Western military-industrial complex controlled by the elite, whose ultimate goal is to destroy America militarily and economically. The troops who served in the first Gulf War have almost all been cycled out of the military, so the poor new recruits currently serving in Iraq and Afghanistan know little or nothing of their appalling fate. The policy seems to be to give troops a limited operational lifespan, after which they are killed or incapacitated to make way for the next round of cannon fodder. Meanwhile hundreds of billions of dollars are being bled from U.S. taxpayers to finance this destruction. As George Orwell concluded in 1984,
War is a way of shattering to pieces, or pouring into the stratosphere, or sinking into the depths of the sea, materials which might otherwise be used to make the masses too comfortable...
In the next chapter, we'll find out who really benefits from the The War on Terror, and conjecture who the terrorists really are.
Chapter 8 End Notes
1. Sam Burcher, European
Directive Against Vitamins & Minerals, Institute of Science in Society.
2. Matthew Grant, What next for the UKIP?, BBC, London, 13 July 1999. See http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk_politics/392150.stm
3. Dr Keith Strelling, E.M.U and the Growth of Economic and Political Power in the E.U. See http://www.gtorrington.freeserve.co.uk/documents/strellng.htm
4. Understanding the E.U., transcript
of a video by The Silent Majority group.
5. Scott Granneman, Electronic
Voting Debacle, The Register,18 Nov.2003.
6. Paul Festa, California voting machine called into question, CNET News.com, 4 Nov. 2003.
7. Scott Granneman op cit.
9. Kim Zetter, E-Vote Machines Face Audit, Wired News, 12 Aug. 2003. See http://www.wired.com/news/technology/0,1282,59976,00.html
10. Analysis of an Electronic Voting System, Johns Hopkins Information Security Institute Technical Report, ref. TR-2003-19, 23 July 2003. See
Also see these websites for indepth
investigations into electronic voting fraud.
11. Scott Grannemann, op cit.
12. Dennis J. Kucinich, Congressman
for the 10th District of Ohio, Voting Rights.
13. Kim Zetter, op cit.
14. Paul Festa, op cit.
15. Kim Zetter, E-Vote Firms Seek
Voter Approval, Wired News, 20 Oct. 2003. See
16. Implementing electronic
voting in the UK, Office Of the Deputy Prime Minister, 2003. See http://www.odpm.gov.uk/stellent/groups/odpm_localgov/
17. Treaties, Council of Europe website.
18. European Commission against
Racism and Intolerance website. See
19. About Us, European
Monitoring Centre on Racism and Xenophobia (EUMC) website. See
20. House of Lords session 2002-03
32nd report, Select Committee on the European Union,
The proposed Framework Decision on Racism and Xenophobia-an update, 1 July 2003. See
21. The Council of Europe Against
22. Philip Johnston, Britons face
extradition for 'thought crime' on net, The Daily Telegraph, London, 18
Feb. 2003, See http://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/main.jhtml?xml=
23. House of Lords, op cit.
24. Framework decision on
combating racism and xenophobia, European Council website. See
http://europa.eu.int/scadplus/leg/en/lvb/l33178.htm ( summary of the resolution)
vgbwr4k8ocw2/f=/vgdmi7kxegzg.pdf (the actual legislation)
25. Organisation of American States
26. Article 1 of The American
Convention on Human Rights 1969, Inter-American Commission on Human Rights,
Organization of American States website. See
27. Additional Protocol to the American Convention on Human Rights in the Area of Economic, Social and Cultural Rights ("Protocol of San Salvador"), November 1988, Inter-American Commission on Human Rights, Organization of American States website. See http://www.cidh.oas.org/Basicos/basic5.htm
28. Model National Legislation
for the Guidance of Governments in the Enactment of Further Legislation Against
Racial Discrimination, Office of The High Commissioner for Human Rights
29. Daniel Hannan, Back in the
USSR for the EU's latest members, The Daily Telegraph, London, 1
June 2003. See
30. Ambrose Evans-Pritchard, Opinion:
If this isn't a superstate in the making, then what is? The Daily Telegraph,
London, 15th November 2000.
31. Sally Pook, Race claim
against Telegraph man dropped, The Daily Telegraph, London, 21
January 2003. See http://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/main.jhtml?xml=%2Fnews%
32. The Consolidated Treaty
Establishing The European Community,
Title II, The Treaty Establishing The European Community, Part Five, Title I, Provisions Governing The Institutions, Chapter 4, The Committee Of The Regions:
Article 263 (ex Article 198 a).
Also see: Major Steps Towards a Europe of The Regions and Cities in an Integrated Continent, a flowchart published by The EU Committee of The Regions at
33. Government Offices for the English Regions, Office of The Deputy Prime Minister website. See http://www.rcu.gov.uk/GO/default.asp
34. What are Regional Chambers ? Office
of The Deputy Prime Minister website. See http://www.odpm.gov.uk/stellent/groups/odpm_regions/
35. Regional Governance,Ibid.,
36. Ukrainian marines stop drivers. BBC, London, 23 September 2003.
and Scottish coast to host war games, BBC, London, 11 September 2003.
37. Response Force demonstrates capability in first exercise, NATO website. See http://www.nato.int/shape/news/2003/11/i031121a.htm
38. Ellen Tomson, Gulf War Illnesses Affect 300,000 Vets, PioneerPlanet / St. Paul (Minnesota) Pioneer Press, 19 September 2000. See http://www.gulfwarvets.com/pioneer.htm
39. Major Doug Rokke, interviewed on Radio Liberty, 12 January 2005. Click here to listen
40. Garth Nicolson Phd, Chief Scientific Officer, What's New? The Institute of Molecular Medicine, 4 November 2001. See http://www.immed.org/whatsnew/WhatsNewAddition01-11-4.htm
THE WAR ON TERROR
In some ways ...[Julia]... was far more acute than Winston, and far less susceptible to Party propaganda. Once when he happened in some connexion to mention the war against Eurasia, she startled him by saying casually that in her opinion the war was not happening. The rocket bombs which fell daily on London were probably fired by the Government of Oceania itself, 'just to keep people frightened'. This was an idea that had literally never occurred to him. She also stirred a sort of envy in him by telling him that during the Two Minutes Hate her great difficulty was to avoid bursting out laughing.
- George Orwell, 1984
Some of the most comprehensive sources on government sponsored terrorism are Paul J. Watson's book, Order Out of Chaos: Elite Sponsored Terrorism and the New World Order, and Alex Jones' book, 9-11 Descent into Tyranny. Most of the citations can be checked at www.infowars.com, www.prisonplanet.com and www.propagandamatrix.com. This chapter does little more than to summarize these works. There are also some useful websites specifically on 9/11, such as www.septembereleventh.org, www.911Truth.org, www.letsroll911.org, www.reopen911.org, www.911inplanesite.com and www.911citizenswatch.org.
9.1 CIA/MI6/Mossad/ISI: THE GLOBAL TERRORIST NETWORK
When a government wants to do something unpopular, such as taking all our rights away, it secretly creates a more immediate problem, such as demolishing skyscrapers in Manhattan. To satisfy public demand that no more skyscrapers be demolished in Manhattan, the government... takes all our rights away. The people give thanks to Big Brother for his protection and look back with nostalgia on their love affair with civil rights. This is 'problem-reaction-solution' where the sponsors of an undesirable measure pose it as a solution to another problem they secretly created.
This crude device was described by Orwell in 1984. The Party sponsored Emmanuel Goldstein's terrorist network, 'The Brotherhood' and pretended that Oceania was engaged in continual wars against Eurasia and Eastasia. The external threat justified the totalitarian system; anybody who opposed it was an enemy of the state. In the same way today, anybody who supports freedom and opposes war must be a member of Al-Qaeda.
It is worth noting a few passages in 1984 to compare with the current 'War on Terror'. Emmanuel Goldstein was once high up in the Party before before becoming a counter-revolutionary:
He was the primal traitor, the earliest defiler of the Party's purity. All subsequent crimes against the Party, all treacheries, acts of sabotage, heresies, deviations, sprang directly out of his teaching... He was the commander of a vast shadowy army, an underground network of conspirators dedicated to the overthrow of the State.
Goldstein was often seen on the telescreen mouthing his specious claptrap:
He was abusing Big Brother, he was denouncing the dictatorship of the Party, he was demanding the immediate conclusion of peace with Eurasia, he was advocating freedom of speech, freedom of the Press, freedom of assembly, freedom of thought, he was crying hysterically that the revolution had been betrayed
Despite the daily arrests of members of The Brotherhood, Goldstein himself was never caught:
... although Goldstein was hated and despised by everybody, although every day and a thousand times a day, on platforms, on the telescreen, in newspapers, in books, his theories were refuted, smashed, ridiculed, held up to the general gaze for the pitiful rubbish that they were in spite of all this, his influence never seemed to grow less.... Somewhere or other he was still alive and hatching his conspiracies: perhaps somewhere beyond the sea, under the protection of his foreign paymasters, perhaps even -- so it was occasionally rumoured -- in some hiding-place in Oceania itself.
It is marvellous to behold the the brazen attempt by Western governments to pose Osama Bin Laden as a real-life Goldstein in order to justify the watchful eye of Big Brother and to take the world to the brink of a third world war.
There are many historical examples of governments using problem-reaction-solution, either committing atrocities and blaming it on their enemies or actually creating enemies for political purposes. Emperor Nero burned Rome and blamed it on the Christians. Hitler burned the Reichstag and blamed it on the communists. Both used this as an excuse to persecute their political enemies. In March 1962, U.S. Army General Lyman L. Lemnitzer presented a plan to the Defense Secretary Robert McNamara for the invasion of Cuba. The Joint Chiefs of Staff had agreed to stage terrorist outrages to be blamed on Fidel Castro, including hijacking aircraft, sinking an American ship and violent terrorist attacks on U.S. cities. Fake casualty lists in U.S. newspapers would cause a 'helpful wave of indignation'. The official documents on Operation Northwoods were de-classified in 2002 and are now available to read.(1)
Islamic terrorism is a corner-stone of the elite's long range planning for a New World Order. The hand of the globalists can be seen grooming Islamic jihad in the Islamic heartlands of the Middle East and central Asia. According to a recent United Press International report:
Israel and Hamas may currently be locked in deadly combat, but, according to several current and former U.S. intelligence officials, beginning in the late 1970s, Tel Aviv gave direct and indirect financial aid to Hamas over a period of years... The thinking on the part of some of the right-wing Israeli establishment was that Hamas and the others, if they gained control, would refuse to have any part of the peace process and would torpedo any agreements put in place.
Ariel Sharon and his Likud party decided that it could discredit the PLO, whose aims were moderate, and respond with even greater violence against the Palestinians if they could link it to terrorist outrages.(2)
Similarly the U.S. government played a key role in nurturing its nemesis, Al-Qaeda. By the 1970s the Bushes and the Bin Ladens were owning airports and oil companies together. The majority owners of the world's largest military investment company, the (U.S)$18 billion Carlyle Group, are the Bushes - and until October 2001- the Bin Laden family. Former British Prime Minister John Major is also on its board. The Carlyle Group has been one of the main beneficiaries of the war in Iraq.(3)
The policy of recruiting Muslim mercenaries to oppose the Soviets in Afghanistan began under President Carter in 1979. Bush Sr. was CIA Director 1975-1979 and U.S. Vice President 1981-1989. The Mujahdeen received American arms and military training care of the CIA's ally, Pakistan Intelligence (ISI) throughout the 1980s. However the same policy continued after the Soviets withdrew from Afghanistan in 1989 and the Cold War came to an end. Pakistani support for the Taleban during the Afghan civil war resulted in financial and military assistance going to the Bosnian Muslim Army in the early 1990s and later to the KLA in Kosovo. From 1992 onwards the ethnically driven disintegration of Yugoslavia was a key juncture for the role of the U.N. as international policeman.(4)(5)
Paul J. Watson's avid attention to the daily news reaped its reward on 7th October 2002 when he saved stories posted on the websites of several British newspapers. A Ministry of Defence D-notice gagging order was issued to stop the press covering the trial of former MI5 agent David Shayler who was charged with breaking the Official Secrets Act. The gagging order came on the same day that the press reported that the government had pressured the judge in Shayler's trial to accept public interest immunity (PII) certificates requiring the press and the public to leave the court if sensitive security and intelligence issues were raised. By the evening of 7th October, the D-notice had forced the London Guardian to erase an article which originally stated:
Government officials and lawyers persuaded two cabinet ministers to sign the PII certificates after they learned that Mr Shayler intended to defend himself at the trial.(6)
However the Evening Standards' article containing some of Shayler's allegations still remains on its website:
Shayler will be defending himself during the trial. He is expected to claim that British Secret Service agents paid up to £100,000 to Osama Bin Laden for an assassination attempt on Colonel Gadaffy in 1996.(7)
The CIA-Pakistan-Bin Laden connection with 9-11 is strongly indicated by the transfer of $100,000 to the lead hijacker Mohammad Atta by Director of Pakistani ISI General Mahmoud Ahmad a few months before the attack. The same Director was in Washington D.C. the week of the attack meeting with Colin Powell and the CIA Director George Tenet.(8)(9)
Le Figaro newspaper reported that between 4th and 14th July 2001, Osama Bin Laden was treated for kidney infection at the the American hospital Dubai. He met with CIA station chief Larry Mitchell and gave him precise information regarding an imminent attack on the U.S. Although the CIA refuted the allegation, Le Figaro refused to retract it stating the French Secret Service were a reliable source for this story.(10)
Direct evidence of U.S. Government protection of Al-Qaeda is the document 199I WF213589 leaked to the BBC by FBI agents. Bush signed this national security order instructing the FBI not to arrest members of Al -Qaeda.(11) Lawsuits have now been filed by FBI agents against the Government in connection with this matter.(12)
Michael Meacher was the former Environment Minister in Tony Blair's Government. He wrote an article in for the Guardian newspaper in September 2003 suggesting that the U.S. Government had prior knowledge of the 9-11 attack and allowed it to go ahead to justify their plan drawn up a year earlier to occupy the Middle East. Mr Meacher detected a strong smell of 'problem-reaction-solution' in the air:
First, it is clear the US authorities did little or nothing to pre-empt the events of 9/11. It is known that at least 11 countries provided advance warning to the US of the 9/11 attacks. Two senior Mossad experts were sent to Washington in August 2001 to alert the CIA and FBI to a cell of 200 terrorists said to be preparing a big operation (Daily Telegraph, September 16 2001). The list they provided included the names of four of the 9/11 hijackers, none of whom was arrested.
He, like many others, asked the question why when the first hijacking was suspected at 8.20am not a single fighter plane was scrambled to investigate from the US Andrews airforce base, just 10 miles from Washington DC, until after the third plane had hit the Pentagon at 9.38 am. There were standard FAA intercept procedures for hijacked aircraft. Between September 2000 and June 2001 the U.S. military launched fighter aircraft on 67 occasions to chase suspicious aircraft. It is a U.S. legal requirement that once an aircraft has moved significantly off its flight plan, fighter planes are sent up to investigate. It appears that U.S. air defence was deliberately stood down on the morning of 9/11. (13)
Mr Meacher concluded his article by pointing out the shortage of hydrocarbon fuel in the coming decades and the need to take preemptive action to secure new supplies. Whilst the loss of the World Trade Center was measured in billions the oil and gas reserves of Kazakhstan, Uzbekistan and Turkmenistan are estimated to be more than $3 trillion. Iraq has the second largest oil reserves in the world after Saudi Arabia. In 1997, the Taleban were meeting with representatives of Unocal to negotiate a pipeline deal for central Asia. However by February 1998, Unocal was petitioning Congress for a stable secular Afghan government due to the failure of these negotiations.(14) Pakistan, Afghanistan and Turkmenistan signed an agreement for a $3.2 billion pipeline deal on 28 Decemeber 2002.(15)
The BBC reported that Niaz Niak, a former Pakistan foreign secretary, was told by senior American officials at a meeting in Berlin in July 2001, that military action against Afghanistan would go ahead by the middle of October. It also reported that before 9/11, U.S. Special Forces were massing on the border with Tajikistan preparing for full scale invasion.(16)
But how did the military-industrial complex pull off the events of 9/11? There is some confusion over who the hijackers actually were. Four of the five named hijackers supposedly on flight 11 which hit the north tower have since turned up alive and well denying they had anything to do with the attack.(17) Northrop Grumman's RQ-4A Global Hawk is a remote control reconnaissance aircraft developed for the U.S Airforce. The U.S. Airforce Technology website reads:
In April 2001, Global Hawk made aviation history when it completed the first non-stop flight across the Pacific Ocean by an unmanned, powered aircraft, flying from Edwards AFB, California, to the Royal Australian Air Force Base, Edinburgh, South Australia.(18)
The military technology for flying planes into buildings by remote control existed on 9/11. Original mainstream media footage and witness testimony supporting this possibility can be be found at www.letsroll911.org and www.inplanesight.com.
9.2 PROLIFERATING WEAPONS OF MASS DESTRUCTION
As suggested in the previous chapter, the War on Terror is designed to take the world to the brink of World War III, as the necessary crisis (problem) to precipitate the dawn of global government (reaction-solution). This is why the elite have been proliferating weapons of mass destruction since the 1980s.
The U.S. supported Saddam in the Iran/Iraq war between 1980 and1988. However, turning Saddam Hussein into a credible threat to the West required a helping hand from Uncle Sam. Donald Rumsfeld the U.S. Defense Secretary met Saddam in 1983 to ease the way for U.S. companies to sell Baghdad biological and chemical weapons components.(19)
In 1994, the Clinton administration initiated the 'Agreed Framework' with North Korea, committing millions of dollars in aid for its nuclear programme, allegedly for electricity generation. In year 2000, Clinton authorized Donald Rumsfeld's company ABB Inc. to build two lightwater nuclear reactors in North Korea. In January 2003, George Bush sought $3.5 million of taxpayers money for the same nuclear programme.(20) The U.S. Government claims that lightwater reactors cannot be used for nuclear weapons production, even though the Congressional North Korea Advisory Group concluded in 1999 that,
If the 1994 Agreed Framework is implemented and two LWRs are eventually built and operated in North Korea, the reactors could produce close to 500 kilograms of plutonium in spent reactor fuel each year; enough for nearly 100 bombs annually if North Korea decides to break its obligations and reprocess the material.(21)
Given that Kim Jong-Il is a brutal dictator who has starved millions of his own people to death, the U.S. Government is building the best enemy money can buy. The result will be an escalation of the 'War on Terror'.
In 1996, President Clinton changed the law and allowed advanced U.S. computer technology to be sold to foreign military users. The super-computers sold to China and Russia were designed for nuclear bomb development, advanced aircraft design, anti-submarine warfare sensor development, and radar applications. These super-computers can run American nuclear bomb design software and codes with little or no modification. They are identical to the computers at U.S. weapons labs right down to the vendor support.(22)(23)
We can only prevent further massive terror attacks and a global conflagration by exposing the cartel behind the curtain that is behind it all. Senator Gary Hart said at a Council on Foreign Relations conference held the day after 9/11:
There is a chance for the President of the United States to use this disaster to carry out what his father - a phrase his father used I think only once, and it hasn't been used since - and that is a new world order.(24)
Chapter 9 End Notes
1. David Ruppe, Friendly Fire, Book: U.S. Military Drafted Plans to Terrorize U.S. Cities to Provoke War With Cuba, abcNEWS.com, 7 Nov. 2001. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/us_military_drafted_plans_to_terrorize_us_cities and http://www.propagandamatrix.com/archiveprior_knowledge#northwoods
2. Richard Sale, Analysis: Hamas
history tied to Israel, United Press International,
18 Jun. 2002.
3.Judicial Watch, Bush Sr. in
Business with Bin Laden Family Conglomerate through Carlyle Group, 28 Sept.
4.Michel Chossudovsky, Professor of Economics, University of Ottawa, Who Is Osama Bin Laden?. See http://globalresearch.ca/articles/CHO109C.html
5.CIA worked in tandem with Pakistan to create Taliban, Times of India, 7 March 2001. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/cia_tandem_create_taliban.html
6. Patrick McGowan, Calls for
secret Shayler trial, Evening Standard, London, 7 Oct. 2002. See
7. Richard Norton-Taylor, Ministers
Issue Gag Orders for MI5 Trial, The Guardian, London, 7 Oct. 2002.
8. Michel Chossudovsky, Professor of
Economics, University of Ottawa, The Role of Pakistan's Military
Intelligence (ISI) in the September 11 Attacks, 2 Nov. 2001. See
Joshi, India helped FBI trace ISI-terrorist links, The Times of India,
Delhi, 9 Oct. 2001.
10. Toby Rose, CIA agent 'met Bin
Laden in July', Evening Standard, London, 31 Oct. 2001. See
11.Greg Palast and David Pallister, FBI
claims Bin Laden inquiry was frustrated
Officials told to 'back off' on Saudis before September 11, The Guardian, London, Nov.2001. See
12. Judicial Watch, Active FBI Special Agent files Complaint Concerning Obstructed FBI Anti-Terrorist Investigations, 14 Nov. 2001. See http://www.judicialwatch.org/archive/2001/printer_1075.shtml
13. Michael Meacher, This war on terrorism is bogus, The Guardian, London, 6 Sept. 2003 See http://politics.guardian.co.uk/comment/story/0,9115,1036688,00.html
14. Julio Godoy, US policy on
Taliban influenced by oil, Asia Times, 20 Nov. 2001.
15. Agreement On US 3.2 Billion
Gas Pipeline Project Signed, PakNews.com, 28 Dec. 2002.
16. U.S. 'Planned Attack on
Taliban', BBC, 18 Sept. 2001. See
17.Paul J. Watson, Order Out of Chaos: Elite Sponsored Terrorism and the New World Order, Alex Jones Productions, 2003, p.160
18. Global hawk high endurance
unmanned reconnaissance aircraft, USA, Airforce Technology, Website for the
19. Tim Reid, How US helped Iraq
build deadly arsenal, The Times, London, 31 Dec.2002. See
20.Bush Seeks $3.5 Million for Group Building N. Korean Reactors, Bloomberg, 17 Jan. 2003. See http://www.prisonplanet.com/011703nkorea.html
21.Clinton Deal Gave N. Korea 100-Nuke-Per-Year Capacity, Newsmax, 19 Oct. 2002. See http://www.prisonplanet.com/101902nkorea.html
22. Charles Smith, Brokering our
own demise, WorldNetDaily, 30 Nov. 1999. See
23. Charles Smith, China and
covert nuclear commerce, WorldNetDaily, 11 May 1999. See
24. Alex Jones Show Interview of
Greg Palast, Infowars.com, 5 April 2002. See
From recent pronouncements and legislative developments it appears both the U.S. and U.K. governments may suspend Parliamentary democracy after the next major terror attack. With the War on Terror expected to go on forever, we may soon find ourselves under a form of indefinite martial law.What is likely to be the purpose of this scenario for the police state planners? The populace will be required to surrender rights to life, liberty and property for short term expediency. This will be the window of opportunity the planners need to purge dissident groups and exploit the popular panic to introduce permanent legal or constitutional changes.
The former objective is uppermost in the minds of the American police state planners. Unlike their British counterparts, they have a large gun-owning New World Order savvy population to contend with. This is not merely the Michigan Militia, but the hundreds of thousands, possibly millions of ordinary Americans who log on to free-thinking websites and listen to uncensored talk radio. Some of these folk, especially the Christians, are targets of the regime and could be dealt with in the manner of the Waco and Ruby Ridge atrocities.
In the U.K. the planners are principally troubled by the eurosceptics who are creating serious popular discontent about the European project. Their approach to the problem may not be quite as 'hands on' as the bully boys in the U.S., but times of crisis offer great opportunity for restricting communication, dirty tricks, deception and propaganda.
HITLER'S ENABLING ACT
After burning down the Reichstag building (home to the German parliament) on 27th February 1933, the Nazis blamed it on the communists and persuaded President Hindenberg to issue a decree invoking article 48 of the Weimar constitution. This placed draconian restrictions on civil liberties which enabled the Nazis to persecute their political opponents in the run up to the elections on 5 March. However the elections failed to deliver Hitler the two-thirds majority necessary to dismantle the constitution. Therefore he continued to use the police state powers of article 48 to intimidate his political opponents. On 23rd March the newly elected Reichstag convened and passed the Enabling Act allowing Hitler to exercise dictatorial rule for four years. In 1937 the act was renewed and remained in force until the collapse of the regime in 1945.
When the Draft Civil Contingencies Bill was published in 2003, it created a furore among civil liberties groups and Members of Parliament. One committee member, former Tory whip, Lord Lucas of Crudwell, raised the prospect that "once a state of emergency is declared [the government] can effectively tear up the rest of the constitution and any bits of this bill [they do not like] and create a republic...". Ms Chakrabati spokesman for Liberty agreed that the most "colourful scenario" could see a secretary of state with "absolute legislative power", theoretically mounting a threat to the whole U.K. constitution.(1) Justified as a "modernization" of the existing 1920 Emergency Powers Act, the Bill proposed to give the police power to run the Internet, Utilities including the phones, transport, local government, and the postal service.(2) If the new measures were introduced, the Government would be able to prohibit any assembly or activity it believed threatened national security. The laws would allow ministers to declare a state of emergency by consulting Her Majesty The Queen but not Parliament.
The Draft Civil Contingencies Bill also allowed police to enforce "emergency cordons" in major British cities in the event of a terrorist attack. The new laws would allow police to stop the spread of infection by throwing "health cordons" around areas hit by biological or chemical attacks, according to the Sunday Times newspaper. It said that people would be prevented from escaping from the affected area. Specially trained armed police and military units would be sent in to enforce the cordons and control any outbreak of disorder including looting. The Ministry of Defence told the newspaper that a new civil contingency reaction force would have the option of using live ammunition. The 7,000-strong force is to be deployed to 14 regions in 2004.(3)
Plans have been drawn up by the Government for a mass evacuation of London in the event of a terrorist attack, reported The Sunday Times in Sept. 2003. Leaked documents detail how residents could be herded into "rest and reception areas" in the Home Counties. Disturbingly it talks about long term rehousing if an attack made an area uninhabitable, raising the possibility of internment and massive government orchestrated confiscation of valuable real estate in the capital.(4)
These new executive powers should also be seen in the context of a drive for a national police force. The war against terrorism is set to be masterminded by a new U.K. police force dubbed "Blunkett's Stormtroopers", Scotland on Sunday revealed.(5)
The Civil Contingencies Act was passed into law on 18 November 2004. I wrote two letters to my M.P. expressing my own concerns about the Act and was delighted to receive detailed replies from Ruth Kelly, Minister for the Cabinet Office on both occasions. She would not accept my reasoning that the important difference between the old and new legislation is that, whereas under the old Act, emergency powers were explicitly restricted to protecting public interests, the new Act makes no such stipulation, allowing them to be used to protect government or financial interests with the associated abuses of power that could entail. The exchange of letters is reproduced on policestateplanning.com
General Tommy Franks, former leader of the coalition forces in Iraq says that if the United States is hit with a weapon of mass destruction that inflicts large casualties, the Constitution will likely be discarded in favor of a military form of government. The General issued the warning in the December 2003 issue of men's magazine Cigar Afficionado. If that happens, Franks said, "... the Western world, the free world, loses what it cherishes most, and that is freedom and liberty we've seen for a couple of hundred years in this grand experiment that we call democracy."(6)
The legislation for a massive internment operation in the U.S. was created when President Ronald Reagan was considering invading Nicaragua. He issued a series of executive orders that provided the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) with broad powers in the event of a "crisis" such as "violent and widespread internal dissent or national opposition against a U.S. military invasion abroad". From 1982-84 Colonel Oliver North assisted FEMA in drafting its civil defence preparations. Details of these plans emerged during the 1987 Iran-Contra scandal. They included executive orders providing for suspension of the constitution, the imposition of martial law, internment camps for over 21 million Americans, and the turning over of government to the president and FEMA. Disturbingly, the full facts and final contents of Mr Reagan's national plan remain uncertain. This is in part because President Bush took the unusual step of sealing the Reagan presidential papers in November 2002. (7) Recent photographs of several gigantic holding areas with guard towers and razor wire are available to view at http://www.apfn.org/apfn/camps.htm(7
Some of the emergency measures made public by FEMA strongly indicate that martial law provisions drawn up by Col. Oliver North under Reagan will be fully operational. On 14 February 2003 the Washington Post reported that Washington DC area schools were planning to prevent parents from picking up their own children in the event of a terrorist attack.(8) In Bolton, Massachusetts, Nashoba regional school district told parents that they would not be allowed to pick up their children during a red alert. Not only will they deny parents their right to pick up their children, they will bus the children to a "secret location".(9)
On 16 March 2003 a Ganett News Service headline read:
Red Alert? Stay Home, Await Word.
If the nation escalates to "red alert," which is the highest in the color-coded readiness against terror, you will be assumed by authorities to be the enemy if you so much as venture outside your home." (10)
Furthermore the Justice Dept. under Tom Ridge has indicated that the military will be used by FEMA to police an emergency after they have revised the Posse Comitatus law. "Posse Comitatus will constantly be under review as we mature this command, as we do our exercises, as we interact with FEMA, F.B.I., and those lead federal agencies out there," said Pentagon spokesman General Eberhart in July 2002.(11)
The Posse Comitatus Act that restricts the use of the military in domestic law enforcement operations was enacted after the Civil War in response to the perceived misuse of federal troops who were charged with keeping order in the South.(12) However, documentary film-maker Alex Jones reveals that Posse Comitatus is already dead. In Texas, U.S. Army soldiers have been performing civilian law enforcement duties off base. According to a U.S. Army SWAT Entry Team Leader with the 38th MP unit at Fort Hood, the City of Killeen has been using the Fort Hood SWAT Team to serve warrants and arrest civilians for at least the past two years.(13)
QUARANTINE AND FORCED VACCINATION
Under The Model State Emergency Health Powers Act drawn up for the Centers for Disease Control (CDC) in November 2001, in the event of a bio-terrorist attack, public health officials want to be able to close roads and airports, herd people into stadiums and, if necessary, quarantine entire infected cities. The "Mandatory Medical Examinations" section (602) of the law, persons refusing to submit to medical examinations and/or testings are liable for misdemeanors and forced isolation. If public health authorities suspect individuals may have been exposed to broadly defined infectious diseases, or otherwise pose a risk to public health, officials may issue detainment orders. In the case of an urban attack, or even one suspected, thousands of people could possibly be marshalled into isolation camps, according to the law. In this case, physicians, assisted by police, will be required to perform state medical examinations and tests. Under the law, "infectious diseases" are very broadly defined. An infectious disease may, or may not, be transmissible from person to person, animal to person, or insect to person. Isolation regulations in the law provide the State with power to commandeer private properties wherein individuals deemed infected, or exposed, might be housed under quarantine. Section 604 of the Act details vaccination and treatment protocols. Following these mandates, public health authorities may compel people to be inoculated and/or drugged by the State. Individuals refusing to be vaccinated or treated would be liable for a misdemeanor, subject to police arrest, isolation or quarantine. The "model legislation" exempts the State, its political subdivisions, including the Governor, public health authorities, the police, or other State officials, from liabilities associated with the death or injury to persons, or damage to property, as a result of complying with, or attempting to comply with, the Act. Furthermore, "Section 807" repeals existing state laws that are in conflict with the Act. Under this part, for instance, previous laws granting medical, religious, or philosophical exemptions to vaccination would be repealed.(14)(15)
Because the all States did not pass this draft legislation unamended, on 13 November 2002, the Homeland Security Act HR5710, which created the Department of Homeland Security, contained a provision giving the Secretary of Department of Health and Human Services (HHS) power to order the forcible innoculation of all Americans with the Smallpox vaccine. He would only have to declare the "potential" of a bio-terror attack to invoke such power.(16)(17)
10.2 FOREIGN TROOPS
Alex Jones videoed a major urban warfare training exercise in Oakland California in 1999. This is corroborated by the U.S. Defense Dept.'s own website on Operation Urban Warrior at http://www.defenselink.mil/specials/urbanwarrior/. Troops from Britain, Australia, and The Netherlands trained with U.S. military and police in direct violation of the Posse Comitatus law forbidding the military from assuming civilian police powers. Alex Jones commentates:
During Operation Urban Warrior, actors posed as American citizens who were unconstitutionally seized from their homes by the military and police. These Americans were rounded up and confined behind barbed-wire. The actors were told to demand to be let free and state that they had rights. They were also told to demand food and water. The troops in turn were taught to ignore them and to order them to behave in an orderly fashion. "Civil disobedience will not be tolerated", was one of the many disturbing statements heard to emanate from the military's loud speakers.(18)
The Defense Dept. states that part of the task was to "conduct a mid-intensity combat operation in an urban environment against a backdrop of civil unrest, and restore order. "(19) Urban Warfare training has taken place in numerous cities over the 1990's including San Antonio, Chicago, Kingsville (Texas), and Pittsburgh.
It is now becoming clear exactly who is going to do the real dirty work against opponents of the New World Order. The proposal for a NATO " rapid reaction force " came from Trojan Horse Donald Rumsfeld in September 2002.(20) The agreement to Rumsfeld's plan was achieved in Prague in November 2002. At the same time Estonia, Latvia, Lithuania, Bulgaria, Romania, Slovakia and Slovenia were invited to join NATO in 2004. (21) Another three countries - Croatia, Albania, and Macedonia - hope to join the organization in the next few years. Who better to put Americans in detention camps than their old communist enemies? On 22nd September 2003, a NATO exercise in Galloway, Scotland saw Ukrainian troops pulling unsuspecting motorists out of their cars in a mock hunt for suspected terrorists. This formed part of a much larger NATO "crisis response" operation called Exercise Northern Lights, a training run for the new NATO Response Force, as it is now called, expected to be partially operational by October 2004 and fully operational by 2006.(22) The Galloway operation and a second operation in Turkey on 20 November 2003. According to the NATO website, "The forces rescued and evacuated the U.N. staff and civilians, established an embargo, engaged in counter-terrorist operations and a show of force". Interestingly, it occurred on the same day as terrorists bombed the British Embassy and HSBC bank in Istanbul, killing 27 people.(23)
In order to justify bringing in foreign troops to combat domestic "terrorism", the U.S. Government will send the National Guard abroad to fight. In 2003, 174,000 of the 350,000 reserves and national guard were on active duty.(24) Since the 1991 Gulf War, the U.S. Government has increased the number of National Guard and reserves in foreign operations. During the Vietnam War, only 8,700 were deployed but over 75,000 Army and Air Guardsmen were called upon to help bring a swift end to Desert Storm in 1991. Since that time, the National Guard has seen the nature of its Federal mission change, with more frequent call ups in response to crises in Haiti, Bosnia, Kosovo, and the skies over Iraq.(25)
10.3 GUN CONFISCATION
Firearms: Everyone should have one and know how to use and clean it - it may just save your life. But more importantly there's nothing that demoralizes an invading enemy more than being shot at. - George Orwell, advice to the Home Guard, 1939. Source: BBC documentary, George Orwell: A Life In Pictures, 14 June 2003
Whether guns cause or prevent crime and need to be controlled for this reason is a controversial issue for many people. However, it is clear from history that civilian ownership of firearms is a major deterant to tyrannical governments. This is why the current move towards gun control in the U.S., supported by the U.N. campaign against small arms, should be viewed with grave suspicion. Unarmed or disarmed citizens are far more likely to be murdered by governments than by common criminals or to die in wars. Gun control laws are often imposed by governments with murderous intent.
Writing in The Arizona Journal of International & Comparative Law No. 3, 483-535 (2000) Stephen Halbrook argues that German Jews and other German opponents of Hitler were not destined to be helpless and passive victims. The 1928 Weimar Law on Firearms and Ammunition required the registration of most lawfully owned firearms, as do the laws of some American states. The Weimar registration programme provided the information which the Nazis needed to disarm the Jews and others considered untrustworthy. In November 1938, the Nazis passed their own Weapons Law which banned Jews from the firearms business and required surrender of all firearms and edged weapons. In the same month came The Night of the Broken Glass (Kristallnacht)--the infamous Nazi rampage against Germany's Jews. Aside from the Jews there was almost no resistance in Germany itself, because the Nazis had enjoyed years in which they could enforce the gun laws to ensure that no potential opponent of the regime had the means to resist. Under the Weimar Law, the German police were granted complete discretion to deny licenses to criminals or individuals the police deemed untrustworthy. The Nazi disarmament campaign began as soon as Hitler assumed power in 1933. Other European countries also had laws requiring police records to be kept on persons who possessed firearms. When the Nazis took over Czechoslovakia and Poland in 1939, it was a simple matter to identify gun owners. Many of them disappeared in the middle of the night along with political opponents. The invasion of Belgium, Holland and France in May 1940 was accompanied by a law called Regulations on Arms Possession in the Occupied Zone which ordered the surrender of all firearms and munitions on pain of death. Switzerland was the only country in Europe, indeed in the world, where every man had a military rifle in his home. Nazi invasion plans acknowledged the dissuasive nature of this armed populace.(26)
In a review by David B. Kopel of the book entitled Lethal Laws, published by Jews for the Preservation of Firearms, Kopel gives a stark warning to advocates of gun control. All of the major tyrannical regimes of the twentieth century imposed restrictive gun laws on the populations before they murdered and terrorized them en masse. The countries examined were Ottoman Turkey, USSR, Nazi Germany, China, Guatemala, Uganda, and Cambodia. The same thing happened in Rwanda and the former Yugoslavia at the time the book was written.
R.J. Rummel, the world's foremost scholar of the mass murders of the 20th century and finalist for 1996 Nobel Peace Prize, gives statistical dimension to state sponsored murder. Statistics of Democide,1997, and Death by Government,1994, provide data on mass murder by governments throughout the 20th century. In chapter 2 of Death by Government he defines the murder of civilians and POW's by governments - in contrast to soldiers dying in combat and civilians who are killed unintentionally during war - as " democide ":
Democide's necessary and sufficient meaning is that of the intentional government killing of an unarmed or disarmed person or people. [emphasis added] (27)
What is the track record of governments of undemocratic countries murdering unarmed citizens? According to table 1.6 in Death By Government, the average estimate of the total number of victims of government sponsored mass murder over the twentieth century was 169,202, 000. If the military and civilian deaths caused by war for the whole twentieth century are added, the death total only rises to an estimated 203,000,000.(28)
The more alarming fact about Rummel's statistics is that the ratio of governments murdering their own citizens to foreign citizens is approximately 3 to 1. Rummel says that of the 169,202,000 democide deaths, 129,908,000 were domestic killings. The biggest murder of citizens by their own governments took place in Russia and China under Stalin and Mao. The Nazis killed mostly foreigners (estimate 20 million) and only about a million of their own. According to Rummel, the People's Republic of China killed a statistically insignificant number of foreigners but a median estimate of 35 million of their own between 1945 and 1987. The USSR killed about 54 million of their own but only 7 million foreigners 1917-1987.(29)
Equally important to our current predicament is Rummell's observation in Power Kills that democide is highly and inversely related to democracy and that democracies never make war on each other:
There is one solution to each and the solution in each case is the same. It is to foster democratic freedom and to democratize coercive power and force. That is, mass killing and mass murder carried out by government is a result of indiscriminate, irresponsible power at the center. Or in terms of the title of this book, power kills. (30)
The most powerful person and the driving force behind the New World Order in the U.S. for the last few decades has been David Rockefeller. In an article in the New York Times, 10 August 1973, he was quoted:
Whatever the price of the Chinese Revolution, it has obviously succeeded not only in producing more efficient and dedicated administration, but also in fostering high morale and community of purpose. The social experiment in China under Chairman Mao's leadership is one of the most important and successful in human history.
David Rockefeller still heads the CFR and Bilderberg group which are working to relinquish American national sovereignty to the United Nations. Stephen Rockefeller works with ex- KGB chief Mikhael Gorbachev to formulate and promote the radical U.N. environmental laws. Since 9/11, Western countries become less and less democratic every day at an alarming pace; this process is being coordinated internationally. Of the seven genocidal governments studied in Lethal Laws, not one announced its intention to its victims. All of the victims were told that they were being temporarily relocated or another lie in order to induce them not to resist. And one of the reasons that the lies were believed by so many people is that there are many governments throughout world history which have sent people on forced marches or other forms of forced relocation and not killed them. Currently, the Bush Administration is contemplating a draft of civilian professionals into the U.S. Army to be sent over to the Middle East. These are America's middle class - engineers, doctors, etc. It has consistently lied to its regular troops about the length of time they will stay in Iraq. At this time, it appears they will be there for years to come. Over three hundred thousand U.S. troops who have served in the Gulf Region since 1990 are now seriously ill with Gulf War Illness and tens of thousands more have died from it.
Chapter 10 End Notes
1. Terror laws are 'needless
totalitarianism', BBC, London, 17 Sept. 2003. See
and Terror threat sparks new powers, 26 Nov. 2003. See
2. David Leppard, Police will run
internet after terrorist attack, The Times Online, London, 15 June
2003. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/
3. 'Terror cordon' plan for UK
cities, BBC, London, 2 Dec. 2002. See
4. Peter Fray, London could be evacuated if attacked, The Sydney Morning Herald, 8 Sept. 2003. See http://www.smh.com.au/articles/2003/09/07/1062901944298.html
5. Ian Johnston, 'Blunkett's Stormtroopers' to open new front in war against terrorism, Scotland on Sunday, 10 Aug. 2003. See http://www.scotlandonsunday.com/uk.cfm?id=873642003
6. Martial Law Will Replace Constitution After Next Terror Attack, Newsmax, 21 Nov. 2003. See http://www.infowars.com/print/ps/franks_martial.htm
7. Ritt Goldstein, Foundations are
in place for martial law in the US, Sydne Morning Herald, 27 July 2002
8. David Cho, Schools Boost
Preparations for Attack, Many Anti-Terror Plans Would Stop Parents From Picking
Up Children, Washington Post, 14 February 2003.
9. Document sent by a parent to Alex
Jones, radio talk show host in Austin TX. See
10. Tom Baldwin, Red Alert? Stay home await word, Gannett News Service, Trenton NJ, 16 March 2003. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/red_alert_stay_home_await_word
11. Northern Command General Endorses Posse Comitatus Review, Newsmax, 22 July 2002. See http://www.newsmax.com/archives/articles/2002/7/22/01218.shtml
12. Gene Healy, Misguided Mission
for Military, The Cato Institute, 31 July 2002. See
13. Martial Law Has Begun,
14. CDC Advances Totalitarian Legislation Under Guise of "Public Health", Tetrahedron, LLC, Health Science Communications, 9 Nov. 2001. See http://tetrahedron.org/news/NR011109.html
15. The Model State Emergency
Health Powers Act, Draft Legislation as of December 2001, The Center for
Law and The Public's Health. See
16. Congressman Ron Paul, U.S. House
of Representatives, Oppose The New Homeland Security Bureaucracy, 13
Nov. 2002. See
17. Section 304, Homeland
Security Act, 2002.
18. Alex Jones, Operation Urban
19. Gar Smith, One nation under
guard, The San Francisco Bay Guardian, 10 March 1999. See
20. Rumsfeld Plans to Propose
NATO Rapid Reaction Force, Defense Secretary Interview with CNN, 21 Sept.
See copy on US Dept of State website
21. Quick Guide: Nato,
BBC, 19 Nov. 2003.
22. Ukrainian marines stop
drivers. BBC, London, 23 Sept. 2003.
and Scottish coast to host war games, BBC, London, 11 Sept. 2003.
23. Response Force demonstrates capability in first exercise, NATO website. See http://www.nato.int/shape/news/2003/11/i031121a.htm
24. Iraq effect shakes National
Guard, Christian Science Monitor, 18 Sept. 2003. See
25. National Guard Fact Sheet,
National Guard website. See
26. Stephen Halbrook, Nazi
Firearms and the Disarming of the German Jews.
See Stephen Halbrook's website for article at http://www.stephenhalbrook.com/article-nazilaw.pdf
also reviewed by David Kopel and Richard Griffiths, Hitler's Control, The lessons of Nazi history. National Review Online 22 May 2003 http://www.nationalreview.com/kopel/kopel052203.asp
Halbrook's article is also a chapter in a book published by Jews for the Preservation of Firearms called Death By Gun Control. Halbrook cites a review by David Kopel of an earlier JPFA publication called Lethal Laws by Jay Simkin, Aaron Zelman, & Alan M. Rice. See http://www.jpfo.org and http://www.lethallaws.com/kopel.htm.
27. published on-line at http://www.hawaii.edu/powerkills/DBG.CHAP2.HTM
28. R.J. Rummel, Death By
Government, New Brunswick, N.J.:Transaction Publishers, 1994,
Table 1.6. See http://www.hawaii.edu/powerkills/DBG.TAB1.6.GIF
29. R.J. Rummel, Statistics of Democide: Genocide and Mass Murder Since 1900, Charlottesville, Virginia: Center for National Security Law, School of Law, University of Virginia,1997; and Transaction Publishers, Rutgers University, Table 16A. Summary Democide Totals. See http://www.hawaii.edu/powerkills/SOD.TAB16A.1.GIF
30. R.J. Rummel, Power Kills,
Democracy as a Method of Nonviolence, New Brunswick, N.J.:
Transaction Publishers, 1997. See http://www.hawaii.edu/powerkills/PK.CHAP1.HTL
THE LEGAL APPARATUS OF TOTALITARIANISM
... war hysteria is
continuous and universal in all countries, and such acts as raping, looting,
the slaughter of children, the reduction of whole populations to slavery, and
reprisals against prisoners which extend even to boiling and burying alive, are
looked upon as normal, and, when they are committed by one's own side and not
by the enemy, meritorious.
- George Orwell, 1984, part 2, chapter 9
The War on Terror is the chosen pretext for the global integration of police, intelligence and military functions. Since 9/11, there has been a global attack on civil liberties and a race to set up the international technological infrastructure for a high-tech feudal society. Governments across the world are promoting the idea that society must militarize itself in order to be free from terror, i.e. abandon moral convictions, sweep aside distinctions between foreign and domestic threats, and even the distinction between terrorism and ordinary crime. When a country is at war, their is no atrocity it will not justify in the name of victory. Once the legal and technological apparatus of totalitarianism is established, there exists the very real prospect of a permanent planetary dictatorship where human existence is micro-managed from cloud cuckoo land by a tiny ruling elite who are themselves above the law.
The European globalists seized upon the Madrid train bombing of 11 March 2004 to push forward key areas of E.U. judicial and security integration. Brussels responded with a 'counter-terrorism summit' which drafted 57 proposals on criminal justice, security, and terrorism. Britain had hitherto been reluctant to surrender judicial powers to Brussels, but following the summit, Whitehall signaled that the Government was preparing to drop its veto over important areas of judicial cooperation. (1) These included many proposals which were already on the table in Brussels: The establishment of an E.U. intelligence agency and E.U. security coordinator; an E.U. database of forensic material; the logging of all telecommunications; tracking all air travel in and out and within the E.U. (effectively an E.U. version of the U.S.'s controversial PNR, CAPPS II and US-VISIT plans); the fingerprinting of nearly everyone in the E.U. by the introduction of biometric passports and ID cards for citizens and the same for resident third country nationals; the development of the Schengen Information System (SIS) and Visa Information Systems (VIS) to store the new identification and visa data; and simplification of procedures for exchange of information - including personal information such as DNA, fingerprints and visa data - between intelligence and law enforcement agencies.(2)
An analysis by StateWatch of London, concluded that 27 of the 57 proposals had little or nothing to do with tackling terrorism.
11.2 MENTAL HEALTH LAWS
The U.K. Government is moving to expand the use of mental health laws to control the wider population. The draft Mental health Bill published in June 2002, included plans to force mentally ill people living in the community to take their medication and proposals to detain dangerous people with severe personality disorders even if they have not committed a crime.(3) 'Serious personality disorder' has no medical diagnosis. The Joint House of Commons and House of Lords Committee on Human Rights have serious reservations about some aspects of the draft:1)The compulsory detention of people for the protection of others when the people detained have never been charged with any criminal offence; 2) the breadth of circumstances in which a patient could be subjected to compulsory, non consensual treatment; 3) that part of current laws which prevents detention 'by reason of promiscuity or other immoral conduct, sexual deviancy or dependence on drugs or alcohol' has been omitted from the Bill. The committee warned that Nazi Germany and the U.S.S.R. were probably not the only countries in which socially or politically unacceptable behaviour was regarded as a manifestation of a 'disorder of the mind'. (4)
In the U.S., Missouri dentist Charles Sell has waited in a federal prison for more than four years for trial on charges of Medicaid fraud. The delay is attributed to the Government's persistent argument that Sell is not mentally competent to stand trial unless he is forcibly drugged. He is, they say, suffering from delusions because he thought there was a Government effort to cover up his personal knowledge of the its culpability in the 1993 deaths at the Branch Davidian land near Waco, Texas. The state has diagnosed Sell as having what it calls a 'delusional disorder'. As an Army Reservist called up to serve as an expert in forensic dentistry, Dr. Sell was on the scene the day of the tragic fire. Other issues include accusations of Dr. Sell using politically incorrect swear words. The Government wants to make him competent by forcefully giving him powerful medicine. Dr. Sell doesn't want to be medicated since he's had bad reactions to similar drugs in the past. Also, one of the medicines that the Government might want to use on him is an experimental medicine that could kill him.(5)(6)
The twentieth century's most tyrannical regimes pioneered the use of psychiatric 'treatment' against political dissidents. Vladimir Bukovsky spent 12 years in Soviet prisons and psychiatric hospitals due to his outspoken opposition to communism.(7) Wherever manifestations of dissidence couldn't be explained away as a legacy of the past, they were viewed as mental illness. One leading psychiatrist had incarcerated thousands of sane men in lunatic asylums on orders from the KGB. Drugs were administered as punishment for anti-social behaviour. These are not only painful but can have lasting side effects. Bukovsky said that a few of the doctors called the psychiatric hospital in which he was interned, 'our little Auschwitz.'(8)
11.3 ABOLITION OF JURIES AND ARBITRARY DETENTION
The 2003 Criminal Justice Act contains three areas of serious concern: 1) Removal of the right to trial by jury in complex fraud cases or where the judge and prosecution believe their is a risk of jury tampering 2) abolishing the double jeopardy makes all acquittals conditional; 3) the admissibility of previous convictions, acquittals and hearsay evidence.(9)(10)This is moving British justice towards a European style inquisitorial system, away from the traditional adversarial system. These measures are designed to harmonize the U.K. with the E.U. Corpus Juris proposal put forward in April 1997. CJ will set up a European Public Prosecutor on the continental inquisitorial model, who will have over-riding jurisdiction throughout Europe to instruct national judges to issue arrest warrants against suspects and have them held in custody for nine months pending investigation (or transported to other countries in Europe) with no obligation to produce prosecution evidence and no right to a public hearing during this time. The cases are then to be tried by special courts, consisting of professional judges and excluding simple jurors and lay magistrates. The E.U. public prosecutor is responsible for both investigation and prosecution of the crimes. Our rights of habeas corpus established in 1679 and trial by jury established by Magna Carta in 1215 are to be nullified. Furthermore, the European Arrest Warrant removes the need for any formal extradition procedures for 32 crimes, some of which are not even crimes in U.K. law. These include xenophobia and racism which encompass criticism of the E.U.. The Corpus Juris manual itself, (Sous la direction de Mireille Delmas-Marty, ISBN 2-7178-3344-7, p40, para 3), informs us that: "[Corpus Juris is] designed to ensure, in a largely unified European legal area, a fairer, simpler and more efficient system of repression."(11)(12)(13)(14)(15)
Under the Anti-Terrorism, Crime and Security Act 2001, the Home Secretary could order that a foreign national be detained indefinitely on suspicion that he was either a terrorist or a threat to national security. However, in December 2004, the law lords ruled that these powers contravened the European Convention on Human Rights and ordered the release of twelve foreign nationals who could otherwise have been detained in prison indefinitely. In response, the Government introduced the Prevention of Terrorism Bill, which gives the Home Secretary power to impose 'control orders' on both British and foreign terror suspects. Instead of holding suspects in prison, the control orders could: Impose house arrest or other restrictions on movements, including electronic tagging; restrict association and communication with specified people; restrict use of telephones and the internet. This overturns 800 years of British legal history by taking away both habeus corpus and trial by jury, and giving judicial powers to the Home Secretary! Unsurprisingly it faces a stormy passage through both Houses of Parliament. (16)
On 31 March 2003, Home Secretary David Blunkett, signed an extradition treaty on behalf of the U.K. with his U.S.counterpart, Attorney General John Ashcroft. This ostensibly brings the U.S. into line with procedures between European countries. Parliament was not consulted at all and the text was not available until the end of May. Like the European Arrest Warrant, it removes the requirement on the U.S. to provide prima facie evidence when requesting the extradition of people from the U.K., although that requirement remains when the U.K. makes the request of the U.S..(17)
Section 412 of the U.S.A. Patriot Act allows for the indefinite detention of non-citizens. The Attorney General has unprecedented new power to order their detention based on a certification that he has reasonable grounds to believe a non-citizen endangers national security. Worse still, if no other country will accept them, they can be detained indefinitely in the U.S. without trial. In January 2003, a decision by the 4th U.S. Circuit Court of Appeals in Richmond, Va. on the case of Yaser Esam Hamdi, affirmed the Government's authority to detain indefinitely American citizens captured in foreign battles or those who participate in terrorist attacks against U.S. interests abroad.(18)The court did not address questions about U.S. citizens arrested as enemy combatants in the U.S. Furthermore, in June 2003, a U.S Federal Court ruled that the Government can keep secret the names of the hundreds of foreigners detained since 9/11.(19)The Government has classified as an 'enemy combatant', Jose Padilla of Chicago, who was arrested at O'Hare Airport on suspicion of plotting domestic terrorism after returning from Pakistan. This unconstitutional detention still awaits judicial review (20)
Judicial Review of Padilla's case will be void if Ashcroft's 'Patriot Act II' is passed because it gives him power to designate U.S. citizens 'enemy combatants' for terrorist activity carried out in the U.S.. Section 501 (Expatriation of Terrorists) expands the 'enemy combatant' definition to all American citizens who 'may' have violated any provision of section 802 of the first Patriot Act. Section 101 will also designate individual American terrorists as 'foreign powers' and again strip them of all rights under the 'enemy combatant' designation. Under section 802 of Patriot Act I, the term `domestic terrorism' means activities that, `(A) involve acts dangerous to human life that are a violation of the criminal laws of the United States or of any State; `(B) appear to be intended, `(i) to intimidate or coerce a civilian population; `(ii) to influence the policy of a government by intimidation or coercion; or `(iii) to affect the conduct of a government by mass destruction, assassination, or kidnapping; and `(C) occur primarily within the territorial jurisdiction of the United States.(21) Not only has the Justice Department stated they can infer from conduct that someone is not a U.S. citizen but also under section 201 of 'Patriot Act II', it is a criminal act for any member of the Government or any citizen to release any information concerning the incarceration or whereabouts of detainees. It also states that law enforcement does not even have to tell the press who they have arrested and they never have to release their names. Therefore section 501 of 'Patriot Act II' means that a U.S. citizen engaging in lawful activities can be grabbed off the street and thrown into a van never to be seen with absolutely no right of appeal!(22)(23)
Section 322 of ' Patriot Act II' removes Congress from the extradition process and allows officers of the Homeland Security complex to extradite American citizens anywhere they wish. It also allows Homeland Security to secretly take individuals out of foreign countries.
A draft of the bill was leaked to Washington D.C. watchdog, The Center For Public Integrity, in January 2003. It caused such a furore that the bill was immediately shelved. However there are three ways the Government might use to get it passed: 1) After the next major terror attack, it will be rushed into law by panicked legislators in the same way Patriot Act I was passed in the immediate aftermath of 9/11; 2) the Government will declare martial law and impose the legislation without authority from Congress; 3) the bill will be broken down into pieces and tacked onto other legislation.
On 12 June 2003 the The Guardian newspaper reported that U.S. military officials are making preparations for the trial and possible execution of captives held in Guantanamo Bay, including the construction of a death chamber. A building at the detention camp in Cuba for suspected Al-Qaida members is being renovated to serve as a courtroom for military tribunals, signaling that the U.S. is moving towards bringing charges against some of the prisoners.(24) According to The Mail on Sunday:
American law professor Jonathan Turley, who has led U.S. civil rights group protests against the military tribunals planned to hear cases at Guantanamo Bay, said: "It is not surprising the authorities are building a death row because they have said they plan to try capital cases before these tribunals. "This camp was created to execute people. The administration has no interest in long-term prison sentences for people it regards as hard-core terrorists."(25)
In June 2004, The Washington Post published on its web site an internal White House memo from 1st August 2002, signed by then Assistant Attorney General Jay S. Bybee, which argued darkly that torturing al-Qaida captives "may be justified" and that international laws against torture may be unconstitutional if applied to interrogations" conducted under President Bush. The memo then continued for 50 pages to make the case for the use of torture. The Bybee memo was clearly the basis for the working-group report on detainee interrogations presented to Defense Secretary Donald H. Rumsfeld a year later.(26)(27)
The torture techniques being practiced on teenage goat-herders from Afghanistan(28) are a first step towards using torture on U.S. citizens who are deemed 'enemy combatants' i.e. anybody at all. Pictures of prisoners shackled, bound and with bags over their heads, serves to de-sensitize the public, police and military to the most disgusting but necessary instrument of dictatorship. The notion that torture is acceptable is also being heavily promoted in the mainstream American media.
11.4 EXPANDING THE DEFINITION OF 'TERRORISM'
The purpose of creating crimes of 'domestic terrorism', is to abolish civil rights and to dramatically increase the power of government. This this was forseen in a report published by the U.S. Army War College in July 1994, entitled Revolution in Military Affairs and Conflicts Short of War:
American leaders popularized a new, more inclusive concept of national security. No distinction--legal or otherwise--was drawn between internal and external threats. In the interdependent 21st century world, such a differentiation was dangerously nostalgic. The new concept of security also included ecological, public health, electronic, psychological, and economic threats. Illegal immigrants carrying resistant strains of disease were considered every bit as dangerous as enemy soldiers. Actions which damaged the global ecology, even if they occurred outside the nominal borders of the United States, were seen as security threats which should be stopped by force if necessary. Computer hackers were enemies.(29)
THE UK DEFINITION:
The U.K. 2000 Terrorism Act expands the definition of terrorism to include serious damage to property or computer systems, designed to intimidate a section of the public, and which is carried out for political, religious or ideological reasons. This could include animal rights activism, tree protesters and even some kinds of industrial action. The Home Secretary is afforded powers to designate and proscribe 'terrorist' organizations. This is a very significant power because of the severe penalties imposed for anyone involved or associated with these groups. Amnesty International have pointed out the potential for repressive foreign governments to press for their political enemies to be so designated. Membership of a proscribed organization carries a ten year prison sentence. Organizing or addressing a meeting which includes members of a proscribed group is an offence under section 12. This even criminalizes independent third parties such as journalists who arrange private meetings which include a member of proscribed group. Section 56 criminalizes any level of activity within a proscribed group even if it has nothing to do with terrorism. It carries a maximum sentence of life imprisonment. Section 57 imposes ten years imprisonment for possessing something which could be construed as being intended for use in terrorist activities.
Section 44 of the Terrorism Act allows police limited power to stop and search people for articles 'of a kind which could be used in connection with terrorism'. The important issues are that the police do not have to demonstrate any grounds for reasonable suspicion whereas The Police and Criminal Evidence Act (PACE) allows a constable stop and search authority if they are acting on reasonable grounds. Secondly if the constable does find the items in question, and if there is reasonable suspicion that they will be used for terrorist purposes, they may be seized and retained.(30) Section 44 notices have been used by police to stop and search protesters at RAF Fairford during the Iraq war and more recently against protesters at an international arms fair in London.(31)
THE EU DEFINITION
Article 1 of the Framework Decision on Combating Terrorism December 2001 reads:
[offences] which are intentionally committed by an individual or a group against one or more countries, their institutions or people with the aim of intimidating them and seriously altering or destroying the political, economic or social structures of those countries will be punishable as terrorist offences.
Article 4 extends the definition to include 'instigating, aiding, abetting or attempting to commit a terrorist offence' and Article 5m., 'Promoting of, supporting of or participation in a terrorist group.' Explanatory notes state that Article 3., defining terrorist offences 'could include, for instance, urban violence'. The inclusion in Article 3f. of the 'unlawful seizure of or damage to state or government facilities, means of public transport, infrastructure facilities, places of public use, and property' (property covers public and private) could embrace a wide range of demonstration and protests, ranging from the non-violent Greenham Common protests against a U.S. cruise missile base in the U.K., to the anti-globalization protests in Genoa. The phrase in Article 3h.,'endangering people, property, animals or the environment', could refer, for example, to animal right protests.(32)
Under Article 5. the prison sentences imposed are long: 5l., Directing a terrorist group 15 years; and 5m., promoting of, supporting of or participation in a terrorist group, 7 years. Terrorists will also lose their right to vote.
The E.U. anti-terrorism laws are being directed against protesters at E.U. summits and other international conferences. Following the arrest and shooting of protesters at the E.U. summit in Gothenberg 14-16 June 2001, a Police Cooperation Working Party met in Brussels on 4 July. This was quickly followed by a series of meetings by the E.U. Council's Justice and Home Affairs committee who requested that member states participate in i) surveillance of protest groups ii) the plan to create a new database on the Schengen Information System (SIS) on protestors; iii) the plan agreed to bring together para-military police units (eg: carabineri, CRS, Tactical Support Groups for EU Summits and international meetings.(33)
THE AMERICAN DEFINITION
Under section 802. of the Patriot Act , the term 'domestic terrorism' means activities that, `(A) involve acts dangerous to human life that are a violation of the criminal laws of the United States or of any State; `(B) appear to be intended,`(i) to intimidate or coerce a civilian population; `(ii) to influence the policy of a government by intimidation or coercion; or `(iii) to affect the conduct of a government by mass destruction, assassination, or kidnapping; and '(C) occur primarily within the territorial jurisdiction of the United States.'
Also under section 802, the U.S. Government can bankrupt political organizations it asserts are involved in domestic terrorism. The government can seize and/or freeze the assets on the mere assertion that there is probable cause to believe that the assets were involved in domestic terrorism. The assets are seized before a person is given a hearing, and often without notice. In order to permanently forfeit the assets, the Government must go before a court, but at a civil hearing, and it is only required to prove that the assets were involved in terrorism by a preponderance of the evidence. Section 806 is so broadly defined that it could include anyone who supported a terrorist group in any way.(34)
Section 301-306 of 'Patriot Act II' (Terrorist Identification Database) authorizes a national database of suspected terrorists and radically expands the database to include anyone associated with suspected terrorist groups and anyone involved in crimes or having supported any group designated as terrorist. These sections also set up a national DNA database for anyone on probation or who has been on probation for any crime, and orders State governments to collect the DNA for the Federal government.(28) Section 402 is titled "Providing Material Support to Terrorism." The section reads that there is no requirement to show that the individual even had the intent to aid terrorists. Section 411 expands crimes that are punishable by death. Again, they point to Section 802 of the first Patriot Act and state that any terrorist act or support of terrorist act can result in the death penalty. Section 421 increases penalties for terrorist financing. This section states that any type of financial activity connected to terrorism will result to time in prison and $10-50,000 fines per violation.(35)(36)
A flyer created by the Phoenix FBI suggests that police officers contact the Joint Terrorism Task Force if they encounter any of the following persons (a partial list):
Right Wing Extremists: Defenders of U.S. Constitution against federal government and the U.N. (Super Patriots),
Left Wing Terrorism: Political motivation is usually Marxist/Leninist philosophy
Common Law Movement Proponents: make numerous references to the U.S. constitution, attempt to police the police.
Single Issue Terrorist: Animal Rights, Eco-terrorism, Lone individuals, Cyber penetration, violent anti-abortion extremism
Hate Groups: Black separatists, Christian Identity.(37)
This is not an isolated incident. Alex Jones' film 911:The Road To Tyranny, shows Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) teaching a class of police officers that terrorists include the Founding Fathers of America, gun owners, Christians and home schoolers.(38)
The New York Times announced on 17 September 2003 that there is to be a database of 100,000 suspected terrorists. It will be run jointly by the CIA, FBI, State Dept. and Dept. Homeland Security. Justice Dept. officials said they expected the centre to be operating by December. It will track not only suspected foreign terrorists but also Americans tied to domestic events like violence at abortion clinics.(39)
The 2001 Anti-Terrorism, Crime and Security Act enables the police and security services to go through personal information held by 'public authorities', e.g. medical records, bank statements, school records, Inland Revenue files, even though no crime (let alone terrorist offence) has been committed or even suspected. No judicial oversight is required and indeed the information can be volunteered by the public bodies on a spontaneous basis.(40) 'Public authority ' is defined by the 1998 Human Rights Act (6)(3) as (a) a court or tribunal, and (b) any person whose functions are of a public nature. (41)
Section 19 of the 2000 Terrorism Act makes it a criminal offence punishable by up to five years in prison, not to disclose to the police information that creates suspicion of terrorist activity when discovered in the course of one's ' trade, profession, business or employment'.(42)
On 24 November 2004, the Government introduced the Serious Organised Crime and Police Bill, which sets up a an FBI-style Serious Organized Crimes Agency (SOCA). This Bill is still being debated, but the Fourth Report of the Joint Committee on Human Rights raises serious concerns over surveillance powers granted to the Agency. It confers broad powers to SOCA to gather, store and analyse information relating to crime generally not just serious crime. It also confers broad powers over the kinds of information SOCA gathers, and the disclosure of that information both to the Agency, and by the Agency to other Government departments.
These laws reflects a shift in philosophy towards the E.U. Corpus Juris model, in which one is presumed guilty until proven innocent and therefore deserving of continuous surveillance.(43)
Section 358 of the Patriot Act requires that, in addition to law enforcement, intelligence agencies such as the CIA also receive suspicious activity reports from financial institutions. These reports are usually about wholly domestic transactions of people in the United States, and do not relate to foreign intelligence information. In addition, Section 358 allows law enforcement and intelligence agencies to get easy access to individual credit reports in secret. There is to be no judicial review and no notice to the person to whom the records relate.(44)
Section 215 allows the FBI to force anyone at all - including doctors, libraries, bookstores, universities, and internet service providers - to turn over records on their clients or customers. The FBI does not even have to show a reasonable suspicion to a judge that the records are related to criminal activity, much less the requirement for 'probable cause' that is listed in the Fourth Amendment to the Constitution. Judicial oversight of these new powers is essentially non-existent. All the Government needs to do is make the broad assertion that the request is related to an ongoing terrorism or foreign intelligence investigation. A person or organization forced to turn over records is prohibited from disclosing the search to anyone. As a result of this gag order, the subjects of surveillance never even find out that their personal records have been examined by the government. Section 213 expands the Government's ability to search private property with a warrant but without notice to the owner. This means that law enforcement agents can enter a house, apartment or office with a search warrant when the occupants are away, search through their property, take photographs, download files off their computer and in some cases even seize property and not tell them until later. The Patriot Act also changes the law to allow wiretaps and searches without showing probable cause when 'a significant purpose' is intelligence gathering for regular domestic criminal cases. It also expands the use of warrantless wiretaps to include lists of websites visited and email headers.(45)
Section 106 of 'Patriot Act II' states that Government agents must be given immunity for carrying out warrantless searches of private property. This section throws out the entire Fourth Amendment against unreasonable searches and seizures. Section 123 restates that the Government no longer needs warrants and that the investigations can be a giant dragnet-style sweep. Section 126 grants the Government the right to mine the entire spectrum of public and private sector information from bank records to educational and medical records. This is the enacting law to allow computers to break down all walls of privacy. The Government states that they must look at everything to 'determine' if individuals or groups might have a connection to terrorist groups. From cradle to grave, all Americans will be guilty and never proven innocent. Section 301-306 sets up national databases of suspected terrorists complete with DNA samples. The database will also be used to 'stop other unlawful activities'. It will share the information with state, local and foreign agencies for the same purposes. Section 313 provides liability protection for businesses, especially big businesses that spy on their customers for Homeland Security, violating their privacy agreements.(46)
The Intelligence Authorization Act for Fiscal Year 2004 became Public Law No: 108-177 on 13 December 2003.(47) It achieved one of the objectives of 'Patriot Act II' by removing the need of the FBI to obtain a warrant before conducting searches of third party information. Congressman Ron Paul made a speech against the bill in November:
I am referring to the stealth addition of language drastically expanding FBI powers to secretly and without court order snoop into the business and financial transactions of American citizens. These expanded internal police powers will enable the FBI to demand transaction records from businesses, including auto dealers, travel agents, pawnbrokers and more, without the approval or knowledge of a judge or grand jury. This was written into the bill at the 11th hour over the objections of members of the Senate Judiciary Committee, which would normally have jurisdiction over the FBI. The Judiciary Committee was frozen out of the process. It appears we are witnessing a stealth enactment of the enormously unpopular "Patriot II" legislation that was first leaked several months ago. Perhaps the national outcry when a draft of the Patriot II act was leaked has led its supporters to enact it one piece at a time in secret. Whatever the case, this is outrageous and unacceptable.(48)
RULING CLASS ABOVE THE LAW
Section 312 of 'Patriot Act II' gives immunity to law enforcement engaging in spying operations against the American people and would place substantial restrictions on court injunctions against Federal violations of civil rights across the board. Section 205 allows top Federal officials to keep all their financial dealings secret, and anyone investigating them can be considered a terrorist.(49)
Section 304 of The Homeland Security Act removes liability from anyone involved in administering the smallpox vaccine and other bioterrorist countermeasures: Manufacturers and distributors of countermeasures, hospitals, clinics, and other healthcare entities under whose auspices the countermeasures are administered, and licensed health care professionals or other individuals authorized to administer the countermeasures under state law ("qualified persons").(50)
A study by the Defense Dept.'s Inspector General found that the Pentagon couldn't properly account for more than a trillion dollars in monies spent in year 2000.(51)
Article 1, chapter 1 of Protocol on the Privileges and Immunities of the E.U. states that '...premises and buildings of the Communities shall be exempt from search, requisition, confiscation or expropriation, and their archives shall be inviolable'. Article 12 of Chapter 5 states, 'In the territory of each member state and whatever their nationality, officials and other servants of the Communities shall.... be immune from legal proceedings in respect of acts performed by them in their official capacity, including their words (spoken or written). They shall continue to enjoy this immunity after they have ceased to hold office'. Thus no buildings or offices, filing cabinets, archives or bottom drawers belonging to the E.U., wherever they are located, can be snooped, searched or inspected EVER. These two exemptions alone place the staff and premises of the E.U., in their official capacities, completely above the law.(52)
The European police force, Europol, is included in this legal exemption. Their officials are immune from prosecution and its files cannot be subpoenaed by any court. It is based in the old fortified Gestapo building in The Hague. Article 8 of the Treaty of Amsterdam, signed into law via British Statutory Instrument 2973:1997, concerning Europol officers, declares that,'such persons shall enjoy immunity from suit and legal process in respect of acts, including words written or spoken, done by them in the exercise of their official functions…' (53)(54)
The proof of these incredible statements came in 1999, when the entire E.U. Commission resigned, having been exposed for fraud, yet nobody was prosecuted. The E.U. has been unable to sign off its accounts for the last ten years and an estimated 5-8% of its £63 billion budget disappears in fraud and mismanagement every year.(55)(56) Over 90% of the budget cannot be properly accounted for.(57)
British MEP Theresa Villiers reports that the problem with the Commission's accounts was highlighted by the decision in 2002 by its Chief Accountant, Marta Andreasen, to go public about the total absence of genuine accounting procedures. The Commission was not even using the most basic double entry bookkeeping - in widespread use in Europe since the Renaissance - and used by virtually every company from British Petroleum to the local sweetshop. Andreasen uncovered these facts within weeks of arriving at her post at the European Commission. She quickly approached her bosses, pointing out the very serious problems which she had found and asked for change. She was told that it was her job to sign off on the accounts and if she did not do so, she would be sacked. When she refused to be silenced, the European Commission suspended her and subjected her to a petty campaign of persecution. And who was the man leading this campaign ? None other than former British Labour Party leader, Neil Kinnock, a member of the disgraced Santer Commission which was forced to resign in 1999, and who was subsequently re-appointed as Commissioner in charge of tackling E.U. fraud.(58)(59)
In February 2005, Amnesty International put out a press release concerning the pending enquiry into the murder of human rights lawyer, Patrick Finucane, in which the British Government is alleged to have collaborated as part of its anti-terrorism strategy in Northern Ireland :
The UK government has reneged on its promise to act on the recommendation of Justice Cory, a former Canadian Supreme Court judge, that a public inquiry be held in the case of Patrick Finucane. Instead it has stated that Patrick Finucane's case would be the subject of an inquiry under the new Inquiries Bill now going through parliament. The government has also stated that the Bill aims to take account of "the requirements of national security"
...Under the Inquiries Bill:
the inquiry and its terms of reference would be decided by the executive; no independent parliamentary scrutiny of these decisions would be allowed;
the chair of the inquiry would be appointed by the executive and the executive would have the discretion to sack any member of the inquiry;
the decision on whether the inquiry, or any individual hearings, would be held in public or private would be taken by the executive;
the decision to issue restrictive notices to block disclosure of evidence would be taken by the executive;
the final report of the inquiry would be published at the executive's discretion and crucial evidence could be omitted at the executive's discretion, "in the public interest". (60)
Chapter 11 End Notes
1. Richard Norton-Taylor, EU set
to agree sweeping counter-terror policies, The Guardian, 25 March
2. StateWatch, Scoreboard on
post-Madrid counter-terrorism plans, 23 March 2004.
3. Milburn promises Mental Health Bill, BBC, London, 14 Nov. 2002. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/milburn_promises_mental_health_bill
4. Mental health rights fears,
BBC, London, 11 Nov. 2002. See
5. Robert B. Bluey, Forced
Drugging Case Headed to Supreme Court, CNSNews.com, 29 Nov. 2002.
6. Michael Arnold Glueck, M.D. and
Robert J. Cihak M.D., American Conscience: The Saga of Dr. Charles Sell,
Newsmax, 26 March 2003. See
7. Edmund Conway, Don't pay TV
licence fee, campaigners urge viewers, The Daily Telegraph, London, 08
Nov. 2002. See http://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/
8. Vladimir Bukovsky, To Build A
Castle: My life as a Dissenter, 1978, p.196.
9. Criminal Justice: Battle
Against the Bill, Liberty. See
10. Criminal Justice Act,
2003, Part 7. See
11. Phillip Day, Are You Furious
and Paddling Yet? The Campaign For Truth in Europe. See
12. Commentary, Corpus Juris (a
euro-sceptic website), 01 Jan. 1999
13. Philip Johnston, Britons face
extradition for 'thought crime' on net, The Daily Telegraph, 18 Feb. 2003. See
14. Philip Johnston, Blair
accused of treason over Europe, The Daily Telegraph, London, 21 Sept. 2000. See
15. Petrina Holdsworth, Bye Bye
British legal System, UK Independence Party website. See
16. Restrictions that UK suspects
may face, BBC News online, 27 Feb 2005. See
17. New UK-US Extradition Treaty,
Statewatch website, analysis no 18. 2003. See
18. U.S. Can Hold Citizens as
Combatants, Fox News website, 08 Jan. 2003. See
19. US terror arrests to remain
secret, BBC, London, 17 June 2003. See
20. Charles Lane, In Terror War,
2nd Track for Suspects Those Designated 'Combatants' Lose Legal Protections, Washington
Post, 1 Dec. 2002. See
21. How the USA PATRIOT Act
redefines "Domestic Terrorism"
American Civil Liberties Union website, 6 Dec 2002
22. Alex Jones, A Brief Analysis of the Domestic Security Enhancement Act 2003, Also Known as Patriot Act II, 10 Feb 2003. See http://www.infowars.com/alexjones.html
23. Patriot Act II, draft version
leaked to the Center for Public Integrity on 9 Jan. 2003. Available to download
in full at: http://www.publicintegrity.org/dtaweb/
24. David Teather, US plans for
executions at Guantanamo, The Guardian, London, 12 June 2003,
25. US plans death camp, news.com.au,
26 May 03.
26. Robert Scheer, Conservatives
put Bush above law, polkonline.com, 17 June 2004
27. Mark Sherman, White House
Won't Release Gonzales Papers, The Guardian, 6 January 2005
28. Duncan Campbell, Afghan prisoners beaten to death at US military interrogation base The Guardian, London, 7 March 2003. See http://www.guardian.co.uk/international/story/0,3604,909164,00.html
29. Revolution in Military Affairs
and Conflict Short of War . p12, July 1994,
U.S. Army War College. See
30. Anti-Terrorism Legislation in
The United Kingdom, Liberty, 2003.
31. Police questioned over terror act use, BBC, London, 10 Sept. 2003 http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/england/london/3097150.stm
32. EU to adopt new laws on
terrorism, Statewatch, 2003. See
33. Conclusions adopted by the
Council (Justice and Home Affairs) and the representatives of the member states
on 13 July 2001 on security at meetings of the European Council and other
comparable events, doc no 10916/01,16.7.01; also Draft Conclusions on
security at meetings of the European Council and other comparable events, doc
10731/01 and Rev 1, 10 & 11.7.01. See Statewatch article: The "enemy within":EU plans the surveillance of protestors and the criminalization of protests http://www.statewatch.org/news/2001/aug/protest.pdf
Also: Initiative by the Kingdom of Spain for the adoption of a Council Recommendation on the introduction of a standard form for exchanging information on terrorists, Brussels, 29 May 2002 5712/6/02 REV 6.See http://www.statewatch.org/news/2003/apr/spainterr.pdf
34. ACLU, op cit. see http://www.aclu.org/NationalSecurity/NationalSecurity.cfm?ID=11437&c=111
35. Charles Lewis and Adam Mayle, Special
Report, Justice Dept. Drafts Sweeping Expansion of Anti-Terrorism Act
Center Publishes Secret Draft of `Patriot II' Legislation,
The Center for Public Integrity, January 2003. See
36. Alex Jones, op cit.
37. This FBI Flyer is available to
38. 911: The Road To Tyranny, a documentary film by Alex Jones. See http://www.infowars.com/tyranny.htm
39. Eric Lichtblau, Administration
Creates Center for Master Terror 'Watch List', New York Times, 16 Sept
2003. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/
40. Liberty, op cit.
41. U.K. Human Rights Act 1998,
See at http://www.hmso.gov.uk/acts/acts1998/80042--a.htm
42. Liberty op cit., p.13
43. Fourth Report of the Joint Committee on Human Rights, Serious Organised Crime and Police Bill, 12 January 2005. See http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/jt200405/jtselect/jtrights/26/2604.htm
44. How the Anti-Terrorism Bill
Puts Financial Privacy at Risk, ACLU website 23 October 2001.
45. Surveillance Under the USA
PATRIOT Act, ACLU website. See
46. Alex Jones, op cit.
47. Intelligence Authorization
Act for Fiscal Year 2004, H.R.2417, 108th Congress.
48. Ron Paul, Congressman for Texas, speech in the House of Representatives, 20 Nov. 2003. See http://www.fas.org/irp/congress/2003_cr/h112203.html
49. Alex Jones, op cit.
50. Guidance for the Healthcare Community Concerning Section 304 of the Homeland Security Act, CDC website. See http://www.bt.cdc.gov/agent/smallpox/vaccination/healthcare-304-guidance.asp
51. Tom Abate, Military Waste
Under Fire, $1 Trillion Missing - Bush targets Pentagon Accounting, San
Francisco Chronicle, 18 May 2003. See
52. Philip Day, op cit.
54. Ambrose Evans-Pritchard, EU
police force could be a repressive monster, says report, The Daily Telegraph,
31 Jan. 2001.
55. Theresa Villiers MEP, Tackling
Fraud And Mismanagement In The EU, 28 April 2003. See
Also, Top financial watchdog slams EU accounts system, The EU Observer.com. See
56. EU Accounts - A decade of
failure, theconservatives.com, 15 November
57. EU accounts fail to pass muster,
BBC News on-line, 18 November 2003. See
58. Theresa Villiers MEP, Cleaning
Up The Commission. See
59. Ambrose Evans-Pritchard, Tory
MEPs urge Kinnock to resign, The Daily Telegraph, London,15 March
60. Amnesty International Press
Release, AI Index: EUR 45/003/2005 (Public), News Service No: 034,11 February
THE TECHNOLOGICAL APPARATUS OF TOTALITARIANISM
[T]he capacity to assert social and political control over the individual will vastly increase. It will soon be possible to assert almost continuous surveillance over every citizen and to maintain up-to-date, complete files, containing even the most personal information about the health or personal behavior of the citizen in addition to more customary data. These files will be subject to instantaneous retrieval by the authorities.
– Between Two Ages- America's Role in the Technetronic Era, 1970. Zbigniew Brzezinski,first director of The Trilateral Commission 1973-1976 and U.S. National Security Advisor 1977-1981.
Source:The Rand Corporation website
In an interview with The Times newspaper, the U.K. Information Commissioner, Richard Thomas, expressed his concern that "we don't sleepwalk into a surveillance society".(1) He said that there is a growing danger of East German Stasi-style snooping if the state gathers too much information about individual citizens. He was referring to three projects in particular, which Brzezinski foresaw over thirty years ago: the proposed Identity Card scheme which will have personal details and the fingerprints of everyone in the country; the population database named the 'Citizen’s Information Project' and proposals in the Children Bill - currently before Parliament - which would create a database of personal information on all children from birth to age 18 and details of their parents.
These and many other measures and technologies are being introduced piecemeal across the globe and justified individually. However collectively, they constitute the awesome global network of big brother surveillance planned decades ago.
12.1 ID CARDS AND BIOMETRIC IDENTIFICATION
After the establishment of biometric ID systems, pressure will begin to build to enact laws that will require citizens to produce an ID whenever a government official demands it. In the countries that already have national ID card systems, the police have acquired such powers e.g. France, Germany, Belgium, Greece, Luxembourg, Portugal, and Spain.(2)
The European Commission has produced two draft Regulations (25.9.03) to introduce two sets of biometric data (fingerprints and facial image) on visas and resident permits for third country nationals by 2005. The biometric data and personal details on visas will be stored on national and E.U.-wide databases and be accessible through the Visa Information System (VIS) held on the Schengen Information System (SIS II). The Regulation stipulates that two biometric identifiers must be held on an imbedded chip in a document. (3)
On 13 December 2004, the E.U. General Affairs Council agreed to adopt a Regulation on mandatory facial images and fingerprints in E.U. passports.(4) Once the details have been decided, replacement and new passports will have to contain facial images within 18 months and fingerprints within three years. The U.K. has not signed up to this Regulation, but is proceeding with biometric passports and ID cards anyway.
The Government introduced The Identity Cards Bill in November 2004, enabling the phased introduction of ID cards by 2008.(5) The Home Office website partly justifies the ID card on the grounds of international requirements, stating that Brits will not be able to travel abroad if we don't have biometric passports and that we might as well have an ID card because the biometric passport system is virtually the same thing!:
The Government's decision to proceed with the introduction of a national identity cards scheme is based in part on the fact that we will have to introduce more secure personal identifiers (biometrics) into our passports and other existing documents in line with international requirements. Right across the world there is a drive to increase document security with biometrics. If our citizens are to continue to enjoy the benefits of international travel, as increasing numbers of them are doing we cannot be left behind. It is worth remembering that 21 of the 25 EU Member States (all apart from the UK, Ireland, Denmark and Latvia) have identity cards.
Already the International Civil Aviation Organisation (ICAO) has established standards in the use of biometrics in passports and a biometric British passport will be introduced in 2005 that will incorporate a computer chip to store a facial image biometric. The United States is introducing a biometric passport requirement for all visitors going to the US without a visa.
The decision to introduce biometrics into existing identity documents has therefore already been made. Without an identity cards scheme, the majority of the population would be enrolled via existing identity documents like passports anyway. The costs involved in this would be nearly the same as implementing a comprehensive identity cards scheme available to the whole resident population, but without the added benefits.
The British anti-ID campaign, www.no2ID.net, outlines the main aspects of the system (6):
1. The National Identification Register. The heart of the system. Clause 1 of the Bill imposes an obligation on the Secretary of State to establish a central population register containing a wide range of details of every UK citizen and resident aged from 16 years and 3 months.
2. The code. Clause 2 (6) requires that every individual must be given a unique number, to be known as the National Identity Registration Number (NIRN). This number will become the “key” for government and private sector organisations to access information on the register and to share that information.
3. Biometrics. Clause 5 (5) requires individuals to submit to fingerprinting and “other” means of physical identification. This is likely to include electronic face scanning and iris recognition.
4. The card. Clause 8 establishes the actual identity card, generated from and containing the information in the Register.
5. Legal obligations. Clause 15 establishes a requirement to produce the card in order to obtain public services.
6. Administrative convergence. The number and the card register are used by a variety of agencies and organisations as their administrative basis. 1 (5) permits the bringing together of all registration numbers (National Insurance, NHS, etc) used by a person.
7. Cross notification. Agencies will be required to notify each other of changes to a person's details. Clause 19 authorises the Secretary of State to disclose details from the register to other agencies without the consent of the individual.
8. New crimes and penalties. The Bill establishes a large number of new crimes and offences to ensure that people comply with the ID requirements.
A Canadian parliamentary committee has unexpectedly told the Canadian Parliament that it could find no evidence to justify a national ID card scheme. Members almost unanimously declared the proposal a waste of time and resources. Government MP Joe Fontana, who chairs the committee, told press that the Committee was still struggling to determine why an ID card was even needed. "I think the fundamental question of why do we need to have a national ID card has yet to be answered,'' he said.(7)
It was only a matter of days after the attack of September 11th before some members of the U.S. Congress proposed the implementation of a national ID card system as a way of thwarting terrorist attacks. The national ID card had been proposed in the past as a way of stopping illegal immigration. Larry Ellison, chairman and CEO of Oracle, made headlines after 9/11, saying: "We need a national ID card with our photograph and thumbprint digitized and embedded in the ID card". The prospect of massive computer databases or registries, software data collection systems, digital fingerprinting, handprint scans, facial recognition technologies, voice authentication devices, electronic retinal scans, and other 'biometric' surveillance technologies have suddenly become realistic options for government identification purposes.(8)
Due to popular suspicion of a compulsory ID card in the U.S., the federal Government is introducing the measure by stealth. On 16 April 2002, the Subcommittee Hearing on Standardizing State Driver's Licenses proposed establishing a national identity system based on the state driver's licence. The measures proposed unspecified unique biometric identifiers on the new cards.(9) H.R. 418, The Real ID Act, passed in the House in February 2005 and will require states to have either an electronic licence or ID card by 2008, which interestingly is also the year that ID cards will be phased in the U.K.(10)The legislation allows the Dept. Homeland Security to design state ID cards and drivers licenses with biometric information such as retinal scans, fingerprints, DNA data and RFID tracking technology.
Behind these proposals is a huge Government sponsored research effort into biometric technology. The Office of Homeland Security now has a Behavioral Research and Biometrics Science and Technology Directorate. It has awarded a three year contract to International Biometric Group LLC for research into the effects of identity determination systems and processes on international travel, border management and homeland security.(11)
The Science and Technology section of the Office of Homeland Security's National Strategy for Homeland Security, July 2002, states that it wants to develop systems that can measure 'hostile intent' and sensors that can detect immunization status.(12)The section entitled Law contains proposals for increased information sharing, biometric identification, and standardization of state drivers licences.(13)
Biometrics and smart-card technologies will play a major role in the ' U.S. Visit ' project, a $1.5-10 billion project under the Dept. Homeland Security, announced in September 2003. The Enhanced Border Security and Visa Entry Reform Act of 2002 mandated the system and set several milestones, including the collection of biometric information from visitors entering the U.S. by air and sea by the end of 2003. All visitors over the age of 13 will now have their fingerprints taken and stored for 75 to 100 years by the Dept. Homeland Security, which will be shared with other government departments and agencies, and other governments. The E.U. Regulation requiring biometric passports has the secondary effect that whenever E.U. citizens travel abroad (not just to the United States), they will again be required to register their fingerprints and face-scans with foreign governments as their passports are verified. As a result, the E.U. is drastically enlarging the U.S. VISIT programme by turning it against its own citizens and then globalising this practice.(14)
The Transportation Security Administration has a major contract in the works called the Transportation Workers Identification Credential. A pilot program involving 10,000 transportation workers is evaluating biometric technologies that can be used for government, contractor, and private-sector workers at transportation facilities.(15)
The Biometrics Management Office (BMO) has been set up as a central procurement agency for the U.S. Dept. Defense. its motto reads,
...ensuring the right person with the right privileges has access at the right time to support war fighting dominance.... Biometrics are measurable physical characteristics or personal behavioral traits used to recognize the identity, or verify the claimed identity of an individual. We are looking at: facial recognition, fingerprint, hand geometry, iris scan, signature verification, and voice recognition.
All military personnel and DOD civilian employees will be subject to biometric identification.(16) In an interview with the BBC, a BMO spokesman said that biometrics are going to play an increasing role in everyone's lives.(17)The BBC also reported in January 2003 that retinal scanners will be used at the new £14.5m Venerable Bede Church of England Aided School. The technology will be used on pupils buying meals in the school canteen and in the library when children want to take out books.(18) In May 2003, Akron School Board in Ohio gave the go ahead for a finger-printing system to be installed in the school canteen.(19) Since October 2002 the U.N. High Commission for Refugees has been taking compulsory iris-scans of returning Afghan refugees at three centres on the Pakistan border. A total of over 130,000 people have been scanned so far.(20)
The Pentagon is developing a radar-based device that can identify people by the way they walk, for use in a new anti-terrorist surveillance system. Operating on the theory that an individual's walk is as unique as a signature, the Pentagon has financed a research project at the Georgia Institute of Technology that has been 80 to 95 percent successful in identifying people.(21)
In 2001 a company called Graphco teamed up with several other companies to bring face scanning cameras to the Super Bowl in Tampa, FL. After the game, Tampa Bay police reported that the technology pinpointed 19 people with criminal records out of a crowd of 100,000.(22)
Biometrics research has been guided by the U.S. military over the past decade. In 1992, the National Security Agency (NSA) initiated the Biometric Consortium, consisting of representatives from six departments of the U.S. Government and each of the Military Services. The NSA initiated the formation of the Consortium as part of its Information Systems Security mission, with a goal to increase the availability of biometric authentication and identification to meet the needs of the Dept. Defense and other Federal agencies. It is chaired by an NSA agent and its stated objective is to build a consensus in industry and academia around the requirements of the NSA:
[To] Create standardized testing databases, procedures, and protocols for the community and security policy organizations. Provide a forum for information exchange between the Government, private industry, and academia. Establish increased Government and commercial interaction. Facilitate symposia/workshops to include the participation of academia and private industry.(23)
To take advantage of the snooping provisions in Patriot Acts I and II, a project called 'Total Information Awareness Network' was proposed. Although the Government officially shelved the plan in September 2003 due to public outrage, it will only take another terror attack to bring it back. The controversial programme was conceived by retired Admiral John Poindexter and was run by the Information Awareness Office that he headed inside the Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (DARPA). The goal was to develop software that could examine the computerized travel, credit, medical and other records of Americans and others around the world to search for telltale hints of a terrorist attack. Poindexter's office told contractors that he wanted the software to allow U.S. agents to rapidly scan and analyze multiple petabytes of information. Just one petabyte of computer data could fill the Library of Congress more than 50 times.(24)
Whilst the Federal Government officially shelved its TIA network, the States have been working on a similar project independently with Federal backing. Dubbed "Matrix", Multistate Anti-Terrorism Information Exchange, the database has been in use for a year and a half in Florida, where police praise the crime-fighting tool as nimble and exhaustive. It cross-references driving records and restricted police files with billions of pieces of public and private data, including credit and property records. As a dozen more states pool their criminal and government files with Florida's, the Matrix database is expanding in size and power. Organisers hope to coax more states to join, touting its usefulness in everyday policing not just tracking terrorists. Organisers are considering giving access to the CIA even though in the 1970s, Congress barred the CIA from scanning files on Americans. The system is owned by a private company called Seisint, in Boca Raton, but it is federally funded and guarded by state police.(25)
In September 2003, alongside Project VISIT, Dept. Homeland Security launched a Security Planning and Integrated Resources for Information Technology (SPIRIT) system that will combine hundreds to thousands of legacy applications into single computer networks . This will facilitate the creation of a vast federal database encompassing all the large federal agencies. Together, the contracts for this project are worth about $10 billion. In the Information Sharing and Systems section of The National Strategy for Homeland Security 2002, the Government says that it needs to link up all the IT systems of every single agency of the Federal government in order to create accurate terrorist 'watch lists'. More disturbing still is the paper's proposal to use data-mining techniques to interrogate this database in order to spot 'patterns of criminal behaviour' and detain 'suspected terrorists' before they act. (26)(27)(28)
The Transportation Security Administration's Computer Assisted Passenger Prescreening (CAPPS II) system, is being developed to screen travelers, rather like the European Schengen Information System (SIS) that monitors peoples' movement around the E.U.. It will use 'dynamic intelligence information' to select passengers for enhanced screening' authenticated from publicly and commercially available databases to 'run against terrorist or other appropriate federal systems and an aggregate numerical threat score will be generated in less than five seconds'.(29)
UK AND EUROPE
In June 2002 the British Home Secretary sought to expand the scope of section 22 of the Regulation of Investigatory Powers Act 2000. S.22 currently authorizes the police (including MOD police, NCS, NCIS) Secret Intelligence Agencies (MI5, MI6, GCHQ), Customs and Excise and the Inland Revenue, to obtain communications data from companies without a court order for the following purposes:
(2)(a) in the interests of national security;
(b) for the purpose of preventing or detecting crime or of preventing disorder;
(c) in the interests of the economic well-being of the United Kingdom;
(d) in the interests of public safety;
(e) for the purpose of protecting public health;
(f) for the purpose of assessing or collecting any tax, duty, levy or other imposition, contribution or charge payable to a government department;
(g) for the purpose, in an emergency, of preventing death or injury or any damage to a person's physical or mental health, or of mitigating any injury or damage to a person's physical or mental health; or
(h) for any purpose (not falling within paragraphs (a) to (g)) which is specified for the purposes of this subsection by an order made by the Secretary of State
Communications data includes name and address, service usage details, details of who you have been calling, details of who has called, mobile phone location (which through global positioning system tracking chips can place you within 200 meters), source and destination of email, usage of web sites (but not pages within such sites). The draft Statutory Instrument expanded this list to include 24 public bodies, which according to StateWatch, amounted to 1039 individual authorities.(30)(31) The proposed bodies are:
1) Government departments: Dept. Environment, Food and Rural Affairs; Dept. Health; Home Office; Dept. Trade and Industry; Dept. Transport; Dept. Work and Pensions; Northern Ireland Executive's Dept. Enterprise.
2) Local authorities: Any local authority in England and Wales; any fire authority; any council in Scotland; any district council in Northern Ireland
3) NHS bodies in Scotland and Northern Ireland: The common services Agency of the Scottish Health Service; The Northern Ireland Central Services agency for Health and Social Services.
4) Other bodies: Environment Agency; Financial Services Authority; Food Standards Agency; Health and Safety Executive Information Commissioner; Office of Fair Trading; Postal Services Commission; Scottish Drug Enforcement Agency; Scottish Environmental Protection Agency; UK Atomic Energy Authority Constabulary; a universal service provider covered by Postal Services Act.(32)
Due to a backlash from civil liberties groups, the plans to expand RIPA S.22 were shelved a week after they were announced.(33)
Separate from the identity card scheme, the Cabinet has given the go-ahead to set up Britain's first national population computer database under the Office of National Statistics. For use by public services, the 'citizen information project' is to bring together all the existing information held by the Government on the 58 million people residing in Britain. It will include their name, address, date of birth, sex, and a unique personal number to form a 'more accurate and transparent' database than existing national insurance, tax, medical, passport, voter, and driving licence records.(34)
The Children Bill introduced on 4th March 2004, proposes a database of all children from birth until adulthood.(35) It was put forward after the failure of official agencies to share information in the Victoria Climbie child abuse case. School achievements, medical and social services records and parental marital status could be on the database. The Dept. Health is also planning a database detailing treatments and social care for all patients. Childrens' personal files will record every "concern" that a professional has about them. It will also record "concerns" about their parents. The Bill will allow this to happen without the knowledge or consent of children and parents. The information-sharing goes far beyond concerns that a child is at risk of significant harm. It will also include information about other family members that may be considered relevant, such as suspected drug and alcohol misuse or mental health problems.
Clause 8 of the Bill empowers the Secretary of State to define by Regulations what information should be held on the database. There is no limit to this power, and there seems to be nothing to prevent the Secretary of State from ordering that all agency files be held centrally.
Section 11 of the U.K. 2001 Terrorism Act outlined a voluntary code of practice for Internet Services Providers (ISP's) to hold data on customers' web surfing and email for up to 6 years.(36) This ill thought out piece of legislation has since been criticized by MPs as being completely unworkable due the huge burden of record keeping it places on ISPs but the Government is still keen to press ahead with it.(37)(38)
E.U. Directive on Privacy and Electronic Communications (Directive 2002/58/EC) July 2002 allows member states to pass laws mandating the retention of the traffic and location data of all communications taking place over mobile phones, SMS, landline telephones, faxes, e-mails, chat rooms, the Internet, or any other electronic communication device. The retention of the contents of the communications are not covered by the Directive, but the purpose is exactly the same as the British proposals, applied to 450 million citizens: To keep a log of who you have phoned and when; who you have exchanged emails with and when; who you have sent short messages via mobile phone to and when; which internet pages you visited and for how long.
The Directive reverses the 1997 Telecommunications Privacy Directive by explicitly allowing E.U. countries to compel ISPs and telecommunications companies to record, index, and store their subscribers' communications data. These requirements can be implemented for purposes varying from national security to criminal investigations and prosecution of criminal offences, all without specific judicial authorization.(39)The Directive requires records to be kept for up to 24 months.(40) The list of data to be retained by ISPs and telecoms companies was drawn up by Europol as revealed in a confidential document obtained by Statewatch containing the agenda of the Expert Meeting on Cybercrime of 10th April 2002. (41)
At the summit which followed the Madrid bombing in March 2004, the E.U. accepted a draft Framework Decision on data retention at the request of the U.K., France, Ireland and Sweden. This strengthened the 2002 Directive by extending data retention to up to 3 years and widened its use from specific investigations to "prevention and detection" of crime. This opens the door for a dragnet style sweep on the American "Total Information Awareness" model.(42)
British police have a database of 2 million DNA samples taken from people charged with criminal offences. This is the first of its kind in the world. In September 2003 Kevin Morris, chairman of the Police Superintendent's Association said he would urge the Home Secretary to consider extending the database to everyone in the country in order to solve crimes quicker and prevent them happening.(43) In March 2003 the Home Office announced proposals to take and store DNA samples from anyone arrested even if they are released without charge.(44) The highest court in the land, the law lords, ruled on 22 July 2004 that police can keep these DNA samples indefinitely.(45)
The proposals for a DNA database under 'Patriot Act II' were outlined in the previous chapter. However, the FBI already hold a DNA database of 1.5 million people. In April 2003, the U.S. Government announced plans to include DNA samples from everybody arrested even if they are not charged.(46)
12.4 IMPLANTABLE MICROCHIP
A study of future military strategy entitled Airforce 2025 was drawn up by the U.S. Air University in 1996. In the section Information Operations: A New War Fighting Capapility, the authors suggest the advantages of satellite linked implanted brain microchips over other communication systems. These will allow the implanted personnel to 'pull a computer-generated mental visualization of the desired battlespace anytime, anywhere'. It suggests that the civilian population can become conditioned to accept the concept of implanted troops in the way they have become accustomed to other medical implants.(47)
Researchers at the University of Southern California are now developing the world's first prosthetic brain part. Funded by DARPA, they are learning how to build sophisticated electronics and integrate them into human brains which could one day lead to cyborg soldiers and robotic servants as well as putting them into diseased brains for medical purposes. Under DARPA'S Brain Machine Interface Program, MIT researchers have monkeys in a laboratory can control the movement of a robotic arm using only their thoughts. This is technology which can literally read your mind.(48) (49) (50)
A Mexican company called Solusat is marketing the Verichip, manufactured by military contractor Applied Digital Solutions of Florida (ADS), as an anti-kidnapping device. The RFID Verichip is injected under the skin and emits a radio frequency signal which can be detected by a scanner. Other potential uses of the chip, according to company officials, include scanning unconscious patients to obtain their medical records or restricting access to high-security buildings by scanning workers to verify their clearance.(51)
ADS is developing Radio Frequency ID chips able to track the movement of people worldwide using global positioning satellites. The company is field testing its Personal Locator Device, or PLD, which ADS says could help track lost children and sick or elderly family members. Currently the company is marketing a GPS system which uses a strap on monitor or watches.(52) (53) from ADS for other purposes such as.
The current body piercing fashion which is being heavily promoted by the controlled media might be seen against this background. The police state planners are using popular culture to persuade today's youth that it is 'cool' to have pieces of metal inserted into their heads. Being linked up to national defence departments by such artefacts will not be such a 'cool' experience however.
On 7 April 2004, Alex Jones interviewed Conrad Chase, director of the Baja Beach Clubs International, an international chain of exclusive nightclubs. He has introduced the VeriPay system for VIP members of his clubs allowing them to pay for services by swiping their microchipped bodies. Chase himself was implanted at the media launch of the VIP implant system along with stars from the Spanish version of the TV Show, "Big Brother," (called "Grand Hermano" in Spain). Showcased by ADS at a global security conference in November 2003, the VeriPay System is a new syringe-injectable microchip implant for humans, designed to be used as a fraud-proof payment method for cash and credit-card transactions. The chip implant is alleged to be an advance over credit cards and smart cards.(54)
The use of ADS chips has also caught on in government agencies.(55) On 14 July 2004, the Associated Press announced:
MEXICO CITY (AP) - Security has reached the subcutaneous level for Mexico's attorney general and at least 160 people in his office - they have been implanted with microchips that get them access to secure areas of their headquarters.
Mexico's top federal prosecutors and investigators began receiving chip implants in their arms in November in order to get access to restricted areas inside the attorney general's headquarters, said Antonio Aceves, general director of Solusat, the company that distributes the [ADS] microchips in Mexico
12.5 RADIO FREQUENCY IDENTIFICATION (RFID)
Katheryn Albrecht of Consumers Against Supermarket Privacy Invasion and Numbering (CASPIAN) reports:
A new consumer goods tracking system called Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) is poised to enter all of our lives within five years, with profound implications for consumer privacy. RFID couples radio frequency (RF) identification technology with highly miniaturized computers that enable products to be identified and tracked at any point along the supply chain. The system could be applied to almost any physical item, from ballpoint pens to toothpaste, which would carry their own unique information in the form of an embedded chip. The chip sends out an identification signal allowing it to communicate with reader devices and other products embedded with similar chips. Analysts envision a time when the system will be used to identify and track every item produced on the planet. RFID employs a numbering scheme called EPC (for 'electronic product code') which can provide a unique ID for any physical object in the world. The EPC is intended to replace the UPC bar code used on products today. Unlike the bar code, however, the EPC goes beyond identifying product categories--it actually assigns a unique number to every single item that rolls off a manufacturing line. For example, each pack of cigarettes, individual can of soda, light bulb or package of razor blades produced would be uniquely identifiable through its own EPC number. Once assigned, this number is transmitted by a radio frequency ID tag (RFID) in or on the product. These tiny tags, predicted by some to cost less than 1 cent each by 2004, are 'somewhere between the size of a grain of sand and a speck of dust'. They are to be built directly into food, clothes, drugs, or auto-parts during the manufacturing process. They are not removed from the product when it leaves the store. Receiver or reader devices are used to pick up the signal transmitted by the RFID tag. Proponents envision a pervasive global network of millions of receivers along the entire supply chain -- in airports, seaports, highways, distribution centers, warehouses, retail stores, and in the home. This would allow for seamless, continuous identification and tracking of physical items (and their owners) as they move from one place to another, enabling companies to determine the whereabouts of all their products (and owners) at all times. The ultimate goal is for RFID to create a 'physically linked world' in which every item on the planet is numbered, identified, cataloged, and tracked. Since the Auto-ID Center's founding at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT) in 1999, it has moved forward at remarkable speed. The center has attracted funding from some of the largest consumer goods manufacturers in the world, and even counts the Department of Defense among its sponsors. The European Central Bank is quietly working to embed RFID tags in the fibers of Euro banknotes by 2005. With corporate sponsors like Wal-Mart, Target, the Food Marketing Institute, Home Depot, and British supermarket chain Tesco, as well as some of the world's largest consumer goods manufacturers including Procter and Gamble, Phillip Morris, and Coca Cola it may not be long before RFID-based surveillance tags begin appearing in every store-bought item in a consumer's home. (56)
Confidential documents obtained by CASPIAN from the AutoID Center show that the industry is fully aware of the massive unpopularity of RFID technology but is relying on consumer apathy to enable them to force it on the public. To reinforce this apathy, the RFID coalition are hiring PR firms to emphasize the "inevitability" of its introduction.(57)
Gillette introduced RFID into its products early in 2003 and combined them with technology to take a photograph of anyone who picked up the product off the shelf. Trials of this anti-theft technology were undertaken by a Tesco Store in Cambridge U.K. (58) Tesco, the world's third largest retailer is also one of the world's largest promoters of RFID technology, and has recently purchased 20,000 readers and antennas for 1300 of its stores.(59) Wal-Mart is the leading promoter of RFID use in American retailing.
Meanwhile the U.S. Defense Dept. announced in October 2003 that by January 2005 all its suppliers must embed passive RFID chips in each individual product where possible.(60)
The European Central Bank is moving forward with plans to embed RFID tags as thin as a human hair into the fibers of Euro bank notes by 2005, in spite of consumer protests. The tags would allow currency to record information about each transaction in which it is passed. Governments and law enforcement agencies hail the technology as a means of preventing money-laundering, black-market transactions, and even bribery demands for unmarked bills. However, consumers fear that the technology will eliminate the anonymity that cash affords.(61)
On the horizon, the consultants say, is the day when RFID chips would allow shoppers to leave the store without checking out at all and get the bill on their credit card or store account. Stores across the world already track consumer purchases with opt-in loyalty cards. Using RFID to register sales instead of regular checkouts would force people to use the loyalty cards in order to pay for the goods. Anonymous purchases will become a thing of the past. Potential for RFID technology to be used to prescribe or proscribe what people can buy can be seen in the proposed "Fat Tax" whereby sales taxes would be imposed on foods considered to cause obesity. The RFID system could be used to stop people purchasing too many of these items. The "fat tax" idea is backed by major scientific and environmental organizations such as WorldWatch and The Center for Science in the Public Interest and scientists writing in the British Medical Journal.(62)(63) The new Dialogue Youth cards were introduced in October 2003 at the new super-campus incorporating three schools in Midlothian, Scotland, comprising Dalkeith High School, St David's High and Saltersgate school for children with special needs. The use of the cards to monitor eating habits is the latest initiative introduced to fight rising levels of obesity amongst children. The photo ID card is part of a cashless system in the dining areas. Once pupils have topped up the cards with credit, IT systems at the school will be able to record every purchase a pupil makes from the schools' canteen, cafe and vending machines. Those who choose salads and other healthy options will be rewarded with discounts or privileged access to activities.(64)
And who knows, the intelligence services who have access to supermarket databases might decide that your loyalty card needs to be invalidated because their data-mining software has determined that you are a potential terrorist or criminal. If you adjust your behaviour then you may find your loyalty card comes back on-line.
In step with the loyalty card database is the pronouncement by U.S. Postal Service that they are going to end anonymous use of the postal service due to the anthrax mailings in October 2001. The impetus for this move came directly from a Presidential commission, which recommended that USPS introduce sender identification for every item of mail.(65)The investigation of the anthrax mailings by Dr. Leonard Horowitz and Michael Ruppert found that the Government itself was the likely culprit, showing once again how the problem-reaction-solution play is being used to manipulate policy-makers and public opinion into accepting the police state. (66)(67)
12.6 CAR AND MOBILE PHONE TRACKING
One of the best kept secrets in auto manufacturing is the fact that most new cars have black box data recorders in them. Ford and General Motors began phasing them in six years ago and Toyota and Honda also use them. Ford calls it the 'Electronic Data Recorder'; GM calls it the 'Sensing Diagnostic Module.' It's a small device that records your speed, the percentage of throttle, your RPMs, whether you have your foot on the brake and whether your seat belt is buckled and if you get in an accident, deploys an airbag.(68) The U.K. government is looking at implementing a nationwide satellite global positioning system (GPS) that not only links the black box to a national road toll database but also controls the speed of vehicles by linking the black box to throttle control. When the car enters a 40mph zone the GPS will prevent the car exceeding the speed limit. The GPS system could also be used to detect drivers who have not paid vehicle duty or insurance. Most importantly the Government will know exactly where you are at any time because GPS is accurate within ten metres. The prototype system for cars is currently being introduced in lorries in Germany and could be implemented in the UK by 2006. All vehicles would have to be fitted with the black box technology.(69)(70)The Institute for Public Policy Research who support the GPS measure have proposed that the national road charge should be £1.30 per mile adding £16 billion per year to the cost of motoring by 2010.(71)
Mobile phones contain GPS tracking chips which can determine the location of users within a few hundred metres. Under the E.U. data retention Directive, the data that can be retained includes all data generated by the conveyance of communications on an electronic communications network ("traffic data") as well as data indicating the geographic position of a mobile phone user (location data Art. 2 (b) and (c) of Dir. 2002/58/EC).(72) In October 2004 a new service was launched in the U.K. by MobileLocate, a company which enables employers to track their employees by their mobile phones down to 200 metres. The company says it takes just 10 to 15 seconds for a manager to make a request to find a mobile phone and receive a reply.(73)
Secret Government plans to turn mobile phone masts into Big Brother spy stations have been revealed. The new system called Celldar works by analysing radio waves sent out by phone masts. When these waves hit an object they are reflected to the mast. By analysing the reflections, a picture can be built of moving objects nearby, tracking vehicles and people anywhere in the U.K. using the country's 35,000 masts. The Evening Standard has learned that the Ministry of Defence planned a test in October 2003 but an MoD spokesman said he was unable to comment on the project.(74) MoD is hoping to introduce the system as soon as resources allow. Police and security services are known to be interested in a variety of possible surveillance applications. Celldar, is supposedly aimed at anti-terrorism, defence, security, and road traffic management.(75)
12.7 SURVEILLANCE CAMERAS
As previously discussed, biometric facial recognition technology already exists. The Orwellian implications of this are mind-boggling bearing in mind the millions of CCTV cameras worldwide. The Pentagon is developing an urban surveillance system whose centerpiece is groundbreaking computer software that is capable of automatically identifying vehicles by size, color, shape, and license tag, or drivers and passengers by face.(76)
In the U.S., tragic school shootings such as that at Columbine have led to hundreds of schools installing surveillance cameras. Some school districts have allowed the local police or head teacher to access the spyware via the internet and monitor the activities of students and staff at the click of a mouse.(77)(78)
Researchers are working to give the new equipment 'X-ray vision' - the capability to 'see' through walls and look into people's homes. In February 2003, U.S. Federal Regulators in relaxed rules on this "ground-penetrating radar" technology allowing industry to develop technology which gives clearer images. Time Domain Corp., based in Huntsville, Ala., demonstrated a "through-wall motion detector," a briefcase-sized, 10-pound device that can be held up to a wall. A person moving behind the wall shows up as a colorful blob on a small display. The detector is intended for use by law enforcement, firefighters, and the military.(79) The potential military and police use of "through wall surveillance" technology developed by Hughes corp. is discussed in a report by the Department of Applied Military Science at the Royal Military College of Canada. These devices are already being used by police in California and Mexico, and are also designed for urban warfare.(80) Similar technology is useful for seeing through clothing at airports and checkpoints.(81)
In Germany, EADS (European Aeronautic Defense and Space), the Bavarian Police Helicopter Squadron, and the Bavarian Interior Ministry are collaborating on Project Autopol (automatic object recognition for police helicopters) to help law enforcement agencies track illegal residents. Autopol combines automatic target recognition (ATR) technology with an infrared camera installed in a police helicopter. The infrared camera pinpoints warm objects such as people, animals, cars, or power lines. (82)
The U.S. Centibots project, funded by (DARPA), has developed new technology to support the coordinated deployment of as many as 100 robots for missions such as urban surveillance. These small mobile cameras on wheels, have their own artificial intelligence and can hunt fugitives or provide mobile surveillance and security for government agencies.(83)
The Federal National Science Foundation has awarded Bill Kaiser and his engineering team at UCLA $7.5 million to develop a systems of mobile cameras that zip through the countryside on cables. Designed to monitor endangered species and analyze environmental chemistry, they will also extend the urban surveillance grid out into the wilderness.(84)
12.8 BLACK BUDGET FUNDING
Development of the technological apparatus of totalitarianism is possibly being funded by the Pentagon's black budget. The Dept. Defense's Inspector General found that the Pentagon couldn't properly account for trillions of dollars in accounting entries every year.(85) For fiscal year 2000, auditors found $1.1 trillion in bookkeeping entries that could not be tracked or justified and $2.3 trillion worth of untraceable bookkeeping entries for year 1999. (86)
Chapter 12 End Notes
1. Richard Ford, Beware rise of
Big Brother state, warns data watchdog, The Times
2. Identity Cards, Frequently
Asked Questions, Privacy International Website, 24 Aug.1996.
3. Biometrics - the EU takes another
step down the road to 1984, Statewatch, 2003. See
4. Statewatch, news index, December
5. Home Office website, FAQ's on ID
6. FAQ's on ID Cards, www.no2ID.net http://www.no2id.net/IDSchemes/faq.php#1
7. Canadian parliamentary report
ridicules ID cards as pointless, costly and dangerous,
Privacy International Media Release, 8th Oct. 2003. See
8. Adam Thierer, National ID Cards: New Technologies, Same Bad Idea, Cato Institute, Issue #21, 28 Sept. 2001. See http://www.cato.org/tech/tk/010928-tk.html
9. Watching the Watchers - Policy
Report #1, Electronic Privacy Information Center. Feb. 2002. See
Also see http://www.epic.org/privacy/id_cards/
10. Declan McCullagh, National ID
cards on the way?, CNET News.com, 14 February 2005
11. Gail Repsher Emery, Biometrics
company to evaluate technologies for Homeland Security, Washington Technology, 10
Aug. 2003. See
12. The National Security
Strategy for Homeland Security, July 2002, Science and Technology, p.52.
13. Ibid., Law, p.49. See http://www.whitehouse.gov/homeland/book/sect4.pdf
14. An Open Letter to the European
Parliament on Biometric Registration of All EU Citizens and Residents, Privacy
International, 30 November 2004. See
15. Homeland Security takes
action, Washington Technology, 1 Sept 2003; Vol. 18 No. 11. See
16. Biometrics Management Office,
Dept. of Defense website. See
17. Alfred Hermida, Faces and
eyes rival passwords, BBC, London, 23 Jan. 2003. See
18. Eye scanners for school
children, BBC, London, 8 Jan. 2003,
19. Stephanie Warsmith, Students
will scan for meals: Akron school board OKs fingerprint
system, Akron Beacon, 28 May 2003. See
20. UNHCR imposing compulsory iris-scans on returning refugees over six years old, Statewatch, Aug. 2003. See http://www.statewatch.org/news/2003/aug/04afghan.htm
21. Pentagon System Hopes to
Identify Walks, Rocky Mount Telegram, 19 May 2003. See
22. Biometrics Benched for Super
Bowl, Wired News, 31 Dec. 2002. See
23. Background of the US Government's Biometric Consortium, The Biometric Consortium website. See http://biometrics.org/REPORTS/CTST96/
24. Michael J. Sniffen, Pentagon
office creating surveillance system to close, The Associated Press,
copy on StarTelegram.com, 25 Sep. 2003. See
25. Organizers say 'Matrix' Big
Brother database would be tied in with CIA, Associated Press, copy on
26. Homeland Security takes action, Washington Technology, op cit.
27. Amelia Gruber, Government rife with opportunities for small IT companies, survey finds, GovExec.com, 14 Aug. 2003. See http://www.govexec.com/dailyfed/0803/081403a1.htm
28. The National Security Strategy for Homeland Security, Information Sharing and Systems, pp. 55-58
29. Privacy and Human Rights,
a report by Privacy International, 2003. See http://www.privacyinternational.org/survey/phr2003/
30. Regulation of Investigatory
Powers Act, 2000, section 22.See
31. UK government forced to delay
new surveillance powers, Statewatch, news, June 2002. See
32. Stuart Millar, Government sweeps aside privacy rights, The Guardian, London, 11 June 2002. See http://www.guardian.co.uk/Archive/Article/0,4273,4431109,00.html
33. Stuart Millar, Lucy Ward and Richard Norton-Taylor, Blunkett shelves access to data plans, The Guardian, London, 19 June 2002. See http://www.guardian.co.uk/internetnews/story/0,7369,739959,00.html
34. Alan Travis, Secret go-ahead
for ID card database, The Guardian, London, 30 Sept. 2003. See
35. UK: Children Bill to introduce surveillance of every child and record "concerns" about their parents, Statewatch news, April 2004 http://www.statewatch.org/news/2004/apr/07children-bill.htm
36. Anti-Terrorism Legislation in
The United Kingdom, Liberty, 2003, p.29. See http://www.liberty-human-rights.org.uk/resources/
37. MPs urge changes to net snooping laws, BBC, London, 28 Jan. 2003. See
38. Stuart Millar, Internet providers say no to Blunkett, The Guardian, London, 22 Oct. 2002. See http://www.guardian.co.uk/internetnews/story/0,7369,816523,00.html
39. Data Retention,
Electronic Privacy Information Center.
40. Privacy fears over EU
snooping plans, BBC, London, 20 Aug. 2002.
41. EU surveillance of telecommunications,
Statewatch, news, May 2002. See
42. Data retention comes to roost
- telephone and internet privacy to be abolished, Statewatch news,
September 2004. See
43. Simon Jeffery, Police seek DNA record of everyone, The Guardian, London, 8 Sept. 2003. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/police_seek_dna_record_of_everyone
44. Nick Hopkins, Police to get
right to DNA test everyone they arrest, The Guardian, London, 27
March 2003, See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/
45. Police can keep DNA of innocent
people indefinitely, statewatch, September 2004
46.. Richard Willing, White House seeks to expand DNA database, USA Today, 15 April 2003. See http://www.usatoday.com/news/washington/2003-04-15-dna-usat_x.htm
47. LTC William B. Osborne, Maj
Scott A. Bethel, Maj Nolen R. Chew, Maj Philip M. Nostrand and Maj YuLin G.
Whitehead, Airforce 2025, The Air University, August 1996, Information
Operations: A New War-Fighting Capability, Ch.4 Implanted Microscopic
48. Brain Machine Interfaces,
DARPA Defense Sciences Office, Biological Sciences,
49. Michael Rosenwald, Can an electronic device replace damaged brain circuits?, Popular Science, June 2003. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/darpa_cyborg_race
50. Gareth Cook, Defense
Department funding brain-machine work,The Boston Globe, 5 August 2003. See.
51. Tracking Junior With a Microchip, Wired News. See
52. Angela Swafford, Barcoding humans, Boston Globe, 20 May 2003. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/barcoding_humans
53. Digital Angel Corporation website, GPS technology section. See http://www.digitalangel.net/consumer.asp
54. Alex Jones, infowars.com, Baja Beach Club in Barcelona, Spain Launches Microchip Implantation for VIP Members, 7 April 2004 http://www.infowars.com/print/bb/bajaimplantupdate.htm
55. Chip Implanted in Mexico
Judicial Workers,Associated Press 14 July 2004. See
56. Katherine Albrecht, RFID: Tracking everything, everywhere, Consumers Against Supermarket Privacy Invasion and Numbering (CASPIAN). See http://www.stoprfid.com/rfid_overview.htm
57. Alex Jones Interviews Katherine
Albrecht, The Alex Jones Show, 8 July 2003. See
58. Alok Jha, Tesco tests spy
chip technology: Tags in packs of razor blades used to track buyers, The
Guardian, London, 19 July 2003. See http://www.guardian.co.uk/
59. Tesco Spychips,
60. Matthew Broersma, Defense
Department drafts RFID policy, CNET News.com, 24 Oct. 2003.
61. Electronic Privacy Information
Center, RFID page. See
62. Fat tax 'could save lives',BBC,
London, 28 Jan. 2000. See
63. More Absurd Fat Tax Proposals,
Consumer Freedom, 1 March 2000. See
64. Stephen Naysmith, New ID cards let parents spy on what kids eat, Sunday Herald, 26 Oct. 2003. See http://www.sundayherald.com/37698
65. Audrey Hudson, 'Smart stamps' next in war on terrorism, The Washington Times, 26 oct. 2003. See http://washingtontimes.com/national/20031026-124606-8419r.htm
66. Dr Leonard Horowitz, The CIA's Role in the Anthrax Mailings: Could Our Spies be Agents for Military-Industrial Sabotage, Terrorism, and Even Population Control?. See http://www.tetrahedron.org/articles/anthrax/anthrax_espionage.html
67. Investigators Conclude
Russian Defector is Lead Suspect in Anthrax Mailings Case, Tetrahedron LLC.
News Release: No. DITA-81, 30 Aug. 2002. See
68. In-Car Black Boxes: Safety
Measure Or Spy Tactic? Louisville Ky. -- transcript of John Boel's report
shown exactly the way it appeared on WLKY NewsChannel 32 at 11 p.m. on 17 Feb.
69. Juliette Jowit, Black box in car to trap speed drivers, The Observer, London, 3 Aug. 2003. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/black_box_in_car_to_trap_speed_drivers
70. Tom Symonds, Tracking the future of driving, BBC, London, 9 June 2003. See http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk_politics/2975216.stm
71. Anger at £1.30-a-mile road
toll plan, The Scotsman, 14 Oct. 2003. See
72. Electronic Privacy Information Center, op cit.
73. Now Employers Can Spy on
Staff Out of Office, The Scotsman, 17 October 2004
74. Mark Prigg, Secret MoD plan
to create spy stations, The Evening Standard, London, 23 Oct. 2003. See http://www.thisislondon.com/news/articles/
75. Jason Burke and Peter Warren, How
mobile phones let spies see our every move, The Observer, London, 13 Oct.
2002. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/
76. Noah Shachtman, The
Pentagon's Plan for Tracking Everything That Moves, Big Brother Gets a
Brain, Village Voice Media, 9-15 July 2003. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/
77. Sam Dillon, U.S. schools resort
to security cameras, International Herald Tribune, 25 Sept. 2003. See http://www.milestonesys.com/?cid=250&newsId=115.
78. Donna Lowry, Web Cameras Monitor Class Activity, WXIA-TV Atlanta,15 Oct. 2003. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/web_cameras_monitor_class_activity
79. David Ho, Federal regulators
ease restrictions on technology that can see through walls, Associated
Press, copy on The San Diego Union Tribune website. 13 Feb. 2003. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/
80. Major G.J. Burton CD, PPCLI and
Major G.P. Ohlke CD, Intelligence, Exploitation of millimeter waves for
through-wall surveillance during military operations in urban terrain, Land
Force Technical Staff Programme V, Department of Applied Military Science,
Royal Military College of Canada, Kingston, Ontario, 24 May 2000, pp.14, 30,
81. New airport scans could expose travelers: Screeners could get x-ray vision, CNN, 26 June 2003. See http://infowars.com/print/ps/xray_screeners.htm
82. Felix Soh, "Using War Technology to Track Illegals," Singapore Straits Times Online, 15 June 2002, copy on Justice Technology Information Network website, a division of the National Law Enforcement and Corrections Technology Center. See http://www.nlectc.org/justnetnews/06202002.html
83. Cenibots: The 100 Robots
84. Charles Choi, Tiny robots in
the trees, United Press International, science news, copy on
Colaradodaily.com, 12 Oct. 2003. See
85. Tom Abate, Military Waste
Under Fire, $1 Trillion Missing - Bush targets Pentagon Accounting, San
Francisco Chronicle, 18 May 2003. See
86. David Wood, Pentagon's Unreliable Bookkeeping Stands as Obstacle to Bush Reforms, New House News Service, 2001. See http://www.newhouse.com/archive/story1a061301.html
THE FAMILY AND RELIGION
Like the communists, the Western elite are attacking traditional social insitutions which challenge the moral authority of the state. They are promoting New Age religion because it is more suited to their political agendas.
13.1 ELITISM AND THE NEW AGE RELIGION
New Age religion proposes the ascendancy of a ruling elite un-restrained by the moral strictures of ancient religious texts. Whereas monotheistic religions propose a deity who is apart from the world and judges man for his actions, New Age pantheism proposes that God is the collective whole of every entity in the world organized into a spiritual hierarchy. Evolution and reincarnation underpin a spiritual hierarchy headed by the Masters of Wisdom who can communicate telepathically with their followers. The Masters will bring humanity into the Age of Aquarius or The New World Order using their higher wisdom. These ideas stem from the Theosophical movement founded by a Russian woman called Helena Blavatsky born in 1831. The Nazis took Theosophy seriously and Hitler based his genocidal theories of master race, or supermen ( "Ubermenschen") on it.(1)Theosophy has been promoted at the U.N. by The Lucis Trust which enjoys consultative status with its Economic and Social Council.(2)The U.N. is regarded by New Agers as the supreme political instrument of the Hierarchy, which is appropriate given that the U.N. has always been controlled by the elite.(3)
Not only is pantheism used to justify the dictatorship of a ruling elite, it also tied into agendas such as eugenics / bioethics, population control, and radical environmentalism. Pantheistic Earth worship is promoted at the highest level of the environmental movement. As an atheistic parallel of the ten commandments, the U.N. Earth Charter, a 16 point plan for humanity written by Stephen Rockefeller and Mikhail Gorbachev, has been placed in a 500 pound chest called The Ark of Hope.
On page 60 of her book, Manual of the Co-Creators for the Quantam Leap, New Ager Barbara Marx Hubbard states that the spiritual elite will have to kill off one half of the population in order to evolve humanity to the next level: 'We are in charge of God's selection process for Planet Earth. He selects, we destroy. We are the riders of the pale horse, Death'. Hubbard was a former member of the Presidential Committee on National Curriculum and Democratic Party nominee for Vice-President in 1984.(5) (6)
13.2 CAUGHT IN THE ACT AT BOHEMIAN GROVE
On 2nd August 1982 Newsweek magazine reported:
... the world's most prestigious summer camp - the Bohemian Grove - is now in session 75 miles north of San Francisco. The fiercely guarded, 2,700 acre retreat is the country extension of San Francisco's all-male ultra-exclusive Bohemian Club to which every Republican President since Herbert Hoover has belonged. With its high-powered clientèle, coveted privacy and cabalistic rituals, the Bohemian Grove has prompted considerable suspicion... The most important events, however are the "lakeside talks" (past orators: Alexander Hague and Casper Weinberger). This year's speaker was Henry Kissinger on The Challenge of the '80s.(7)
In July 2001, documentary film-maker Alex Jones infiltrated Bohemian Grove, becoming the first person to capture the bizarre occult activities of the Bohemian Club's world leaders on videotape.(8) The centre-piece of the festivities is The Cremation of Care, literally the torching of human compassion. This involves a mock human sacrifice to the sun god Moloch, performed in front of a forty-foot tall stone owl. Alex Jones commentates:
We were all focused at what was going on across the pond. Suddenly the owl was lit up by some flood lights and out ran a hundred priests or so in black, red and green robes. Most of them were in black, some in red and a couple in silver or green robes. Then, out came the high priest, who went through all his incantations about the dead (who is dead at the Grove in the past, may their spirits be conjured and brought back there by the "great owl"). He praised the owl for about twenty minutes and he talked about "goodly Tyre and Babylon".
The priests went on to burn alive a human effigy whose cries for mercy were broadcast through a public address system. Pyrotechnics caused metal crucifixes around the pond to burst into flames.
Religious infanticide was widespread among the ancient peoples of the Eastern Mediterranean region, but the cult of Moloch is the most documented. Baal Moloch (or Molekh) 'The Bull of the Sun' was the sun god of the Phoenecians (called Canaanites in the Bible). He was conceived in the form of a calf or an ox, or depicted as a man with the head of a bull. In many instances the bodies of children were burnt as sacrifices, performed to renew the strength of the sun fire.(9)
Canaan is an ancient term for the country roughly corresponding to what was later historically known as Palestine or The Holy Land, and in modern political terms, Israel and the Occupied Territories. The Canaanites were the Semitic inhabitants of Canaan before the Israelites arrived and it seems that the Israelites followed the Canaanite practice of sacrificing children to Molech. The ritual is described in The Old Testament 'to pass through the fire' and is strongly condemned.(10) Tyre was an major commercial city in the Phoenician empire and many of its kings were named Baal after the sun god. (11)
13.3 TARGETING THE YOUNG
New Age religion and witchcraft have become very popular amongst today's youth because they offer magical power, personal liberation, and an anything goes culture. This is exactly the kind of moral vacuum the elite need to exert control over the population. According to Reuters, 19 June 2003:
Paganism and the ancient art of witchcraft are on the rise in Britain, experts said on Thursday as the summer's most celebrated Pagan festival approached. Television, the Internet, environmentalism and even feminism have all played a role in the resurgence, they say. Soaring Pagan numbers have churches worrying and calling for stricter controls on cult TV programs and films that celebrate sorcery like "Harry Potter," "Buffy the Vampire Slayer" and "Sabrina the Teenage Witch... "Anything that makes teenage girls feel powerful is bound to go down well," joked OBOD's McCabe. Kevin Carlyon, High Priest of British White Witches said "Harry Potter" in recent years had continued the trend, helping create what he called "the fastest growing belief system in the world." (12)
Sponsored by ExxonMobil, 'Harry Potter Day' 2001, saw American children attending public libraries for potion class.(13) Here is a sample of Harry Potter 's occult powers:
Harry longed to bite the man... but he must master the impulse. He had more important work to do. But the man was stirring... Harry saw his vibrant, blurred outline towering above him, saw a wand withdrawn from a belt... He had no choice... He reared high from the floor and struck once, twice, three times, plunging his fangs deeply into the man's flesh, feeling his ribs splinter beneath his jaws, feeling the warm gush of blood... The man was yelling in pain... then he fell silent... He slumped backward against the wall... Blood was splattering onto the floor... His forehead hurt terribly. (14)
K B Toys now make occultic barbie dolls called Secret Spells Christie and Secret Spells Kayla.(15) One company, Mezco Toyz, has invented the Living Dead Doll, a creation straight from a horror movie. The gruesome ten-inch dolls, with devil-red eyes and blood pouring from their mouths, come in their own coffins, along with a death certificate. The characters include Sybill, who is strapped in a straitjacket with a collar and chain, and Inferno, who has auburn hair, fiery eyes and bat-like wings.(16)
13.4 BANNING MONOTHEISM
Meanwhile, the E.U. is attacking religions using human rights laws, just as they are being used to attack national sovereignty. In December 2003, a law was implemented in the U.K. based on a European Union Directive which bans discrimination in the workplace on the grounds of religion, belief, or sexual orientation. Thousands of religious schools, charities and organizations could face legal action if they refuse to employ atheists or homosexuals, or sack staff who become Satanists under proposed Government regulations.(17)
President Bush signed America up to UNESCO on 1st October 2003 after a nineteen year absence. UNESCO'S Manifesto 2000 for a culture of peace and non-violence includes the aim to, 'Defend freedom of expression and cultural diversity, giving preference always to dialogue and listening without engaging in fanaticism, defamation and the rejection of others.'(18) Christianity, Judaism and Islam and most other religions emphatically "reject others" and can be extremely defamatory. Under this rule, monotheistic religions would be muzzled.
UNESCO is equally contemptuous of the family. A 10-part series for teachers, published in 1949 under the title Toward World Understanding, reads like The Communist Manifesto: 'Government schools must stamp out love of country and the family must be viewed as the enemy'.(19)
The U.K. Serious Organised Crime and Police Bill introduced in November 2004, creates a new crime of incitement to religious hatred. This will have the effect of stopping religious groups from criticizing each other, and therefore expressing their core belief that theirs is the only true religion. It also sets a very dangerous precedent that the state can censor criticism of a set of beliefs. What happens when the state declares that euthanasia or another belief of some 'bioethics committee' falls within this protection?
13.5 ENFORCING LOVE OF BIG BROTHER
We have cut the links between child and parent, and between man and man, and between man and woman. No one dares trust a wife or a child or a friend any longer. But in the future there will be no wives and no friends. Children will be taken from their mothers at birth, as one takes eggs from a hen. The sex instinct will be eradicated. Procreation will be an annual formality like the renewal of a ration card. We shall abolish the orgasm. Our neurologists are at work upon it now. There will be no loyalty, except loyalty towards the Party. There will be no love, except the love of Big Brother. -George Orwell, 1984
Chapter 12 described the U.K. Children Bill, 2004, which sets up a database to monitor personal, health and educational information for all children and their families.(20) Currently, under The 1996 Education Act parents can be fined £2500 or sentenced to three months in prison if their child regularly truants from school. In October 2003 the Government proposed introducing £25- £100 fines for each unauthorized absence from class.(21)
13.6 SEXUAL ABUSE
On top of all the tyrannical social politcal agendas, the elite are backing an equally disturbing agenda of sexual abuse. The Daily Telegraph reported on 23rd October 2003:
The European Union's elite are determined to destroy Europe's Christian heritage, Italy's reform minister, Umberto Bossi said yesterday. He described the elite as 'filthy pigs' who wanted to 'make paedophilia as easy as possible'.(22)
Many major paedophile rings have been uncovered which involved members of the ruling class. In June 2003, scandal rocked the Portuguese establishment when it emerged that senior figures were in a paedophile ring at a state run boys orphanage. Among them were Paulo Pedroso, an MP and number two in the opposition Socialist Party; Carlos Cruz, one of Portugal's most popular television journalists; and Jorge Ritto, retired ambassador to UNESCO. The arrest of Pedroso was the first of a politician during the investigation. It followed the testimony of two 14-year-old boys who identified the 38-year-old divorcée from photographs and claimed that they were taken to a country home in Elvas, near the Spanish border, on several occasions during 1999 and 2000 while Pedroso was still a Minister.(23)
French police investigating the disappearance of 115 young women in the Toulouse area between 1986 and 1997 discovered that serial killer Patrice Alègre, a policeman's son, organized the city's prostitution business, providing under-age girls for sadomasochistic orgies with Magistrates, politicians, policemen, journalists and businessmen at Toulouse's Palais de Justice and a chateau owned by Toulouse council.(24)
In January 2003, child porn allegations caused Tony Blair to issue a D-Notice to gag the press from revealing the names of known paedophiles within the British Government. The Sunday Herald has also had it confirmed by a senior source in British intelligence that at least one high-profile former Labour Cabinet minister is among Operation Ore suspects, an operation by Scotland Yard's Paedophile Unit into child porn downloaded from the internet. The Sunday Herald has been given the politician's name but, for legal reasons, cannot identify the person. There are still unconfirmed rumours that another senior Labour politician is among the suspects. The intelligence officer said that a 'rolling' Cabinet committee had been set up to work out how to deal with the potentially ruinous fall-out for both Tony Blair and the Government if arrests occur.(25)
The Independent reported on 12th June 2002:
When police in the tiny republic of Montenegro swooped on a suspected pimp accused of running a major sex trafficking operation, they ran into an embarrassing problem. The man they were about to put behind bars was none other than the country's deputy state prosecutor... Montenegro has been shaken hard by the burgeoning scandal, which allegedly involved leading members of the judiciary, police and political officials. Zoran Piperovic, the republic's deputy prosecutor, was arrested this week, and six other officials have been detained. They are accused of forcing women, mostly from Moldavia, Ukraine and Romania, into prostitution... It is an open secret in the Balkans that people-trafficking rings run through Montenegro to Bosnia and Kosovo, with profits from the dirty trade reaching millions of Euros. The sex-slave routes lead to Italy and Britain, where at least 1,400 women, mainly from eastern Europe, are tricked into prostitution each year. The trade is highly lucrative for the men who "own" them; in London, women can bring in about £100,000 a year for their pimps.(26)
Madeleine Rees, the head of the U.N. Human Rights Commission office in Sarajevo, stated that trafficking in women through Bosnia started with the arrival of the international peace keepers in 1992. As well as 21,000 NATO peace keepers and aid workers, there were police from 40 countries trying to keep Bosnia's warring factions apart. Extra-curricular activities involved running paedophile and prostitution rings with the local criminals.(27) The core of the U.N. international police force in Bosnia were employees of Dyncorp, a US based military contractor. Insight on the News magazine reports that none of the girls were from Bosnia but were kidnapped in Russia, Romania and other places, and transported by DynCorp /U.N. employees and the Serbian mafia.(28) More than 6000 girls aged between 12 and 16 are smuggled to Western Europe each year. Researchers have identified north-eastern Italy as a key sorting centre for girls from Eastern Europe, again underlining the importance of the U.N.'s activities in Bosnia. (29)
A copy of the joint study sponsored by the U.N. High Commission for Refugees and Save The Children, obtained by United Press International, describes the sexual abuse of children in Sierra Leone, Liberia, and Guinea by U.N. and NGO staff. Agency workers from the international and local NGOs as well as U.N. agencies were ranked as among the worst sex exploiters of children, often using the very humanitarian aid and services intended to benefit the refugee population as a tool of exploitation. The assessment team listed sexual allegations and called for further investigation against workers from 42 agencies.(30)
Chapter 13 End Notes
1. Jackson Spielvogel and David Redles, Hitler's Racial Ideology: Content and Occult Sources, Simon Wiesenthal Center, Annual 3. See http://motlc.wiesenthal.com/resources/books/annual3/chap09.html
2. List of the non-governmental
organizations in consultative status with the Economic and Social Council as at
31 July 1998, E/1998/INF/6,Distr. GENERAL, U.N.
3. The Aquarian Age Community
4. The Ark of Hope website.
5. Gary Kah, The Demonic Roots of Globalism, Huntington House Publishers, 1995 p.125
6. Ibid., p.116
7. Bohemian Club, Gaylon Ross
8. Alex Jones, Occult Activities
at the Elite Bohemian Grove, in Northern California Exposed!. See
9. Moloch, Encyclopedia Mythica.
10. Moloch, Catholic Encyclopedia.
12. Pete Harrison, Sabrina, Harry
and the Web Help UK Paganism Grow, Reuters, 19 June 2003,
13. Caryl Matrisciana, Entertainment
at any cost?, WorldNetDaily.com, 9 Nov. 2001. See
14. J K Rowling, Harry Potter and
The Order of The Phoenix, p.463. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/
15. Infowars.com http://infowars.com/print/misc/wicca_barbie.htm
16. Jacqui Goddard, Horror dolls
threaten Barbie, The Scotsman, 25 Nov. 2002. See
17. Jonathan Petre, Euro rules
force Church bodies to employ atheists, The Daily Telegraph, London,
25 Jan. 2003. See
18. Manifesto 2000 for a culture
of Peace and Non-violence, UNESCO. See
19. Phil Brennan, UNESCO:
Strangle This Monster in Its Crib, Newsmax, 18 June 2003. See
20. UK: Children Bill to introduce surveillance of every child and record "concerns" about their parents, Statewatch news, April 2004
21. £100 instant penalty for
truancy, BBC, London, 3 Oct. 2003. See
22. Ambrose Evans-Pritchard, EU
elite are filthy pigs, says Bossi, The Daily Telegraph, London, 23
Oct. 2003. See http://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/
23. Portugal shamed by child sex, The Sunday Herald, 12 Oct. 2003. See http://www.sundayherald.com/37405
24. Paul Webster, Toulouse
officials ordered murder, says serial killer, The Guardian, London,
3 June 2003. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/
25. Neil Mackay, Child porn
arrests 'too slow', The Sunday Herald, 19 Jan. 2003. See
26. Vesna Peric Zimonjic, Government
officials in sex trafficking ring arrested, The Independent, London,
6 Dec. 2002. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/
27. Daniel McGrory, Woman sacked
for revealing UN links with sex trade, The Times, London, 7 Aug.
2002. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/
28. Kelly Patricia O Meara, DynCorp
Disgrace, Insight on the News, 14 Jan. 2002. See
29. Philip Willan, 6,000 children
smuggled to the west each year for sex, The Guardian, London, 12
July 2002. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/
30. U.N. Finally Forced to Probe
Its Pedophilia Scandal, Newsmax.com, 7 May 2002. See
© by Michael Nield 2004, 2005
All rights Reserved.
Permission granted to reproduce for personal and educational use only. Commercial copying, hiring, lending is prohibited
Gradually, by selective breeding, the congenital differences between rulers and ruled will increase until they become almost different species. A revolt of the plebs would become as unthinkable as an organized insurrection of sheep against the practice of eating mutton.
- Bertrand Russell, The Impact of Science on Society
With the restraints of moral conventions and democracy dispensed with, the new utopia offers the holy grail of all dictators: Control over life itself. Yet some of that control has existed for decades in spite of our notionally free and democratic societies. Science offers the great advantage that very few people can understand it. Whoever pays for its conduct and its presentation in the popular media can dictate the consensus on any given issue, simply by asserting that his committee of experts are the most distinguished. The less well funded and represented dissenters are labeled the dangerous 'quacks' and 'junk scientists'.
And this is how the petrochemical-pharmaceutical cartel has killed, injured, and sterilized millions of people over the last hundred years. The same forces that supported Hitler have continued to operate covertly ever since.
Population control is multi-faceted. It includes: Reducing the number of people; eugenics; reducing intelligence levels; mind control; increasing poverty; and creating financial dependence on the pharmaceutical industry. Various facets of the population control agenda can be served simultaneously by the same device.
Facing up to this 21st century holocaust merely requires an acknowledgement of the moral position of its elevated sponsors. Some might be unashamedly evil but most are Malthusians who believe that the there is no sanctity in human life. To 'save the planet' we must kill off most of the people, so said Jacques Cousteau in the UNESCO Courier of November 1991:
The damage people cause to the planet is a function of demographics - it is equal to the degree of development. One American burdens the earth much more than twenty Bangladeshes ... This is a terrible thing to say. In order to stabilize world population, we must eliminate 350,000 people per day. It is a horrible thing to say, but it's just as bad not to say it. (1)
Bertrand Russell, one of the twentieth century's most eminent philosophers, said the same in his book, The Impact of Science on Society:
At present the population of the world is increasing ... War so far has had no great effect on this increase ... I do not pretend that birth control is the only way in which population can be kept from increasing. There are others ... If a Black Death could be spread throughout the world once in every generation, survivors could procreate freely without making the world too full...(2)
Russell also supported the idea of engineering human beings to meet social requirements:
Scientific societies are as yet in their infancy. . . . It is to be expected that advances in physiology and psychology will give governments much more control over individual mentality than they now have even in totalitarian countries. Fitche laid it down that education should aim at destroying free will, so that, after pupils have left school, they shall be incapable, throughout the rest of their lives, of thinking or acting otherwise than as their schoolmasters would have wished. . . . Diet, injections, and injunctions will combine, from a very early age, to produce the sort of character and the sort of beliefs that the authorities consider desirable, and any serious criticism of the powers that be will become psychologically impossible.
The Nazis were more scientific than the present rulers of Russia. . . . If they had survived, they would probably have soon taken to scientific breeding. Any nation which adopts this practice will, within a generation, secure great military advantages. The system, one may surmise, will be something like this: except possibly in the governing aristocracy, all but 5 per cent of males and 30 per cent of females will be sterilized. The 30 per cent of females will be expected to spend the years from eighteen to forty in reproduction, in order to secure adequate cannon fodder. As a rule, artificial insemination will be preferred to the natural method. . . .
Gradually, by selective breeding, the congenital differences between rulers and ruled will increase until they become almost different species. A revolt of the plebs would become as unthinkable as an organized insurrection of sheep against the practice of eating mutton. (3)
The progressively dumbed down society described in Brave New World is desirable to those in the ruling class who believe in 'command and control'. However, with the internet serving as a counter-weight to official disinformation, we can now afford ourselves some protection against a health catastrophe we might otherwise endure at their hands.
14.1 FUNDING POPULATION CONTROL
Displayed on Rockefeller University's website homepage on 3 December 2003, was a picture of a crowded city market with the following caption beneath:
It took from the beginning of time until 1950 to put the first 2.5 billion people on the planet. Yet in the next half-century, an increase that exceeds the total population of the world in 1950 will occur, So writes Joel E. Cohen, Ph.D., Dr.P.H., professor and head of the Laboratory of Populations at The Rockefeller University and Columbia University, in a Viewpoint article in the November 14 issue of the journal Science.(4)
Limiting population growth has been a preoccupation of the European and American elite throughout the twentieth century. The Population Council was established in 1952 by John D. Rockefeller III. The multi-billion dollar World Wildlife Fund is sponsored by British and Dutch Royalty and the elite environmental think-tank, The Club of Rome, counts several world leaders amongst its members. The U.N.'s population control activities receive funding from all the major charitable foundations, especially the Ford Foundation and Rockefeller Foundation. Ted Turner's $1 billion United Nations Foundation and the $24 billion Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation are entirely devoted to population control activities although they are disguised as public health campaigns.
The United Nations Population Fund (UNFPA) is the single largest international source of overt funding for population and reproductive health programmes. Since it began operations in 1969, the Fund has provided nearly $6 billion in 'assistance' to developing countries.(5)The UNFPA only manages one quarter of the world's population control budget for developing countries, which is in excess of $1 billion per year.(6) The Netherlands, Britain, and Japan were by far the biggest funders of UNFPA in 2001, providing almost 50% of the total $396 million.(7) Meanwhile the U.S. Agency for International Development (USAID) gives substantially more money to population control programmes than to healthcare and food assistance.(8)
14.2 AIMS AND METHODS - THE ART OF KILLING QUIETLY
The population control agenda is presented to the public as a universal concern for planetary resources and environmental pollution, and to a lesser degree, socio-economic deprivation, women's rights, and reproductive health. Whatever the truth of these arguments, the point is that population 'control' is coercive. The policy papers on population control contain objectives that are so extreme that coercion would certainly be needed to meet them. The 1972 benchmark environmentalist publication, The Limits To Growth, predicted planetary meltdown by 2050 unless radical limits to population growth were imposed. In 1974, this was translated into hard U.S. national security policy by National Security Advisor, Henry Kissinger. His lengthy National Security Study Memorandum 200 laid out the aims, timescale, and methods of U.S. foreign policy for limiting the population growth of 'lesser developed countries'.(9) Measures were to be taken to keep the world's population growing beyond 8 billion, meaning 500 million fewer people by year 2000 and 3 billion fewer by 2050. However, many suspect that this is nowhere near the real target of the elite and their Malthusian collaborators, which is to cut the world's current population in half. The American population control think tank, Negative Population Growth Inc., recommended in 1992 that the population of the U.S. should be 125-150 million, requiring a 50% cut from its current level.(10) In 1995, the same think-tank published a study recommending an 80% reduction in global population. (11)
In NSSM 200, Henry Kissinger stated that no single approach would 'solve' the population problem. Multiple and seemingly unconnected approaches are also less likely to attract attention. Here follows a short-list of these approaches.
The environmental movement has been an important tool for justifying population reduction. As The Daily Telegraph recently reported, banning the pesticide DDT in the early 1970s was a huge victory for the population controllers. DDT was introduced as an insecticide in the 1940s and promised to eradicate malaria, one of the world's biggest natural killers. Despite all the scientific evidence to the contrary, the powerful environmental lobby declared it dangerous, and so it was banned. As a result, hundreds of millions of lives have been lost to malaria unnecessarily.(12) Alexander King, president of the The Club of Rome, confirmed the real purpose of the ban.
My own doubts came when DDT was introduced. In Guyana, within two years, it had almost eliminated malaria. So my chief quarrel with DDT,in hindsight, is that it has greatly added to the population problem.(13)
14.4 PUBLIC HEALTH POLICY AND WESTERN MEDICINE
THE DRUGS TRUST
The pharmaceutical industry is a multi-trillion dollar business, and healthcare spending consumes a significant proportion of Western GDP. One family in particular has played a key role in the development of the pharmaceutical industry - The Rockefellers. As described in chapters 2 and 4, the Rockefellers invested in the German chemical and pharmaceutical giant, I.G. Farben in the 1930s. Sterling Drug, Inc., was the main cog and largest holding company in the Rockefeller drug empire during the first half of the 20th Century.(14)Today, Rockefeller owned Bristol- Myers Squibb Inc. accounts for nearly half of the chemotherapy sales in the world.(15)
The five leading private medical research institutes in the U.S. are either controlled by, or affiliated to, the Rockefellers: Rockefeller University, Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center, Aaron Diamond AIDS Research Center, Howard Hughes Medical Institute and Cold Spring Harbour Laboratories. These institutes conduct cutting edge medical research which affects the world's entire health care system.
A brief chronology of the establishment of health and educational institutions by John D. Rockefeller:
1889 -1909 The University of Chicago
1901 The Rockefeller Institute For Medical Research, now Rockefeller University
1909 Rockefeller Sanitary Commission for Eradication of Hookworm Disease
1910 In partnership with the Harriman family, funded the Station for Experimental Evolution and Eugenics Records Office in Cold Spring Harbour.
1914 The China Medical Board (16)
The $65 million endowment of the Rockefeller Institute dwarfed the budget of the Public Health Service in the first three decades of 20th century.(17) Rockefeller University is a world leading centre for pharmaceutical medicine. Its website boasts:
In its history, Rockefeller has been associated with 22 Nobel laureates and 18 Lasker Award recipients. Five faculty members have been named MacArthur Fellows and 11 have garnered the National Medal of Science, the highest science award given by the United States. And, 34 Rockefeller faculty are elected members of the National Academy of Sciences... Rockefeller forges collaborations with biotech and pharmaceutical companies as needed to speed research findings into development to improve patient care.(18)
The world's premier AIDS research institution, Aaron Diamond AIDS Research Centre, is affiliated to the Rockefeller University by academic, infrastructural, and administrative ties.(19) Established in 1991, ADARC is the world's largest private research laboratory devoted solely to biomedical research on HIV/AIDS and is currently co-leading China's largest AIDS 'treatment programme'.(20) Rockefeller owned Time magazine voted their man at ADARC, Dr David Ho, 'Man of The Year' in 1996.
The Howard Hughes Medical Institute has worked in partnership with the Rockefeller University since 1986.(21) Founded in 1953, at close of financial year 2002, Howard Hughes Medical Institute endowment was $10.3 billion making it the second largest philanthropy in the USA after the $24 billion Bill Gates Foundation.(22) HHMI currently employs seven Nobel prize winners. (23) Current Trustees include James A Baker III and CEO of the Hughes Corporation, William R Lummis. In 1987 World Bank President, James D Wolfensohn, was elected as trustee. (24)
The Rockefeller University has close ties with Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center.(25) During early 1970s Laurence S. Rockefeller sat on the board of the Memorial Sloan -Kettering Cancer Centre and was trustee of the Sloan Foundation.(26)The Rockefeller University archive reveals that the Rockefellers provided substantial endowment for Memorial Sloan-Kettering. The New York Cancer Hospital, founded in 1884, was one of the first hospitals devoted entirely to the research and treatment of cancer. Later known as the General Memorial Hospital for Cancer and Allied Diseases (1899-1916), and then as Memorial Hospital, it was vastly expanded and modernized in 1936 as a result of contributions by John D. Rockefeller II and the General Education Board. The Sloan foundation was founded in 1934 by Alfred P. Sloan Chairman of General Motors. In 1945, the Sloan-Kettering Institute was created to conduct intensive research in oncology. In 1960 the Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center was formed to serve as an administrative umbrella for the hospital and institute.(27) Rockefeller's modernization involved relocating Memorial to a new site just across the street from Rockefeller University. (28) Nelson A. Rockefeller was a Member of Westchester County (NY) Board of Health from January 1933 to June 1953.(29) Westchester became home to the Phelps Hospital founded in 1952 with Rockefeller money. With a donation of 66 acres on the Hudson River and $500,000 by the Arthur Curtis James Foundation, along with a pledge of $800,000 toward the project by John D. Rockefeller II, the new hospital was born.(30) The Phelps Hospital is now one of the sites of Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Centre.(31) James Robinson III, Chairman of the MSKCC board of Overseers and Managers, is also a director of Bristol-Myers Squibb. Richard Gelb, Vice-Chairman of the MSKCC board, is also Bristol-Myers Chairman of the Board. Richard Furlaud, another MSKCC board member, recently retired as Bristol-Myers' president.(32)
The Station for Experimental Evolution and The Eugenics Records Office was endowed with funds from the Rockefeller and Harriman families in 1910.(33) Since the 1970s, the re-named Cold Spring Harbour Laboratories have been home to the world's cutting edge research programmes on cancer as well as research in neurobiology, plant genetics, genomics, and bioinformatics. James Watson, co-discoverer of DNA, was its Director from 1969 to 1994 and it is undertaking work to map the human genome on behalf of The Human Genome Project.(34) The early research into eugenics at Cold Spring was mirrored by the Rockefellers' funding of racial hygiene research in Germany at the Kaiser Wilhelm Institute for Psychiatry in Munich and The Kaiser Wilhelm Institute for Anthropology, Eugenics, and Human Heredity in Berlin in the late 1920s.(35)
However, the roots of this pharmaceutical stranglehold penetrate deep into the American education system. In 1910, a report was produced by the American Medical Association that changed the course of medical history. Previously, American medical education had been unregulated and suffered a bad reputation. Seeing an opportunity, the Carnegie Foundation offered to produce guidelines and qualifications for medical schools on behalf of the AMA. The Flexner Report, named after Abraham Flexner of the Carnegie Foundation, included recommendations to strengthen courses in pharmacology. Rockefeller and Carnegie then commenced to pour money into those institutions which conformed to the new requirements. To date, Rockefeller, Carnegie, Ford, Sloan, Kellogg and other foundations have showered over a billion dollars on the medical schools of America. (36)
According to The Drug Story by Maurice Bealle, an investigation into Rockefeller influence on medicine, the Rockefeller Foundation was the single largest contributor to American medical education:
Harvard, with its well-publicized medical school, has received $8,764,433 of Rockefeller's Drug Trust money, Yale got $7,927,800, Johns Hopkins $10,418,531, Washington University in St. Louis $2,842,132, New York's Columbia University $5,424,371, Cornell University $1,709,072, etc., etc.(37)
The Rockefellers and their alumni have held key positions directing American public health, and were directly involved with the establishment of American public health institutions. In 1938 Jewish German researchers fleeing Hitler were welcomed at the newly founded National Institutes of Health, built on a private estate in Bethesda donated by John D. Rockefeller.(38)This is still the home of the NIH today. Nelson A. Rockefeller was Under Secretary of Department of Health, Education, and Welfare from June 1953 to January 1955. Prior to this appointment he was Chairman, Special Committee on Defense Organization from February to April 1953 and afterwards, Consultant to Secretary of Defense on Organization of the Department of Defense from January to April 1958. Between January 1953 and December 1958 he was Chairman of the President's Advisory Committee on Government Organization. Rockefeller took the HEW job to reorganize the health department to meet the secrecy requirements of U.S. biological, chemical, and nuclear weapons programme which required substantial testing on unwitting American and Canadian citizens, as described in the section on AIDS below.(39) Laurence S. Rockefeller was also on the board of the Community Blood Council of Greater NY, funded by the Sloan Foundation. (40) Rockefeller University faculty boasts 34 National Academy of Science members and eight of the New York Academy of Sciences' Council currently work for Rockefeller connected companies or institutions. (41)
THE BUSINESS WITH DISEASE
Charges of genocide against the Drugs Trust are appropriate on three counts: 1) Most pharmaceuticals do not cure diseases; 2) Pharmaceuticals kill and injure vast numbers of people; 3) Pharmaceuticals are forced upon the public by governments and effective alternatives are denied.
Given the first two charges, it might seem impossible for the third to be accomplished in a free society. This is how it's done: 1) Laws and regulations controlling medical treatments, mainly administered by agencies such as the Food and Drug Administration in the U.S. and The Medicines Control Agency in the U.K. mandate which treatments are safe, effective, and legal; 2) Professional medical associations who licence doctors dictate what treatments can be prescribed; 3) The British and European model of socialized medicine allows the government health departments to decide health policy and purchase treatment on behalf of the public which very rarely includes non-drug based treatments; 4) Medical research bodies controlled by the Drugs Trust and the government, influence the policies of the previous three. 1, 2, and 3 are the enforcement arm of the cartel whilst method 4 is the propaganda arm. In this way western public health-care system is the epitome of fascism: The corporations use government to enforce a cartel at the expense of the public interest.
Recent articles in the mainstream media and medical journals have revealed the tip of the public death-care iceberg. Killing 250,000 patients a year, doctors are the third leading cause of death in the U.S. according to the Journal of American Medical Association.(42)
A recent editorial in The Lancet (Vol. 359, No. 9313; 2002) warned of the corruption of Western medicine by drug companies. The editors of this most esteemed scientific journal asked, "Just how tainted has medicine become [by pharmaceutical industry payoffs]?" They concluded, "Heavily, and damagingly so," urging "doctors who support this culture for the best of intentions" to "have the courage to oppose practices that bring the whole of medicine into disrepute." (43) Up to half the articles on drugs which appear in mainstream medical journals are written by ghost writers employed by drug companies not the named authors.(44)
Congressman Dan Burton has been investigating vaccines for four years as Chairman of the Dan Burton Committee on Government Reform on The Status of Research into Vaccine Safety and Autism. He believes that conflicts of interest at the Centers for Disease Control (CDC) are a problem, particularly on the vaccine advisory panel:
This presents a real paradox when the CDC routinely allows scientists with blatant conflicts of interest to serve on influential advisory committees that make recommendations on new vaccines, as well as policy matters... All the while these same scientists have financial ties, academic affiliations, and other vested interests in the products and companies for which they are supposed to be providing unbiased oversight.(45)
Dr Matthias Rath, research colleague of Nobel Laureate Linus Pauling and Director of Cardiovascular Research at the Linus Pauling Institute in Palo Alto, California, is a world expert in nutritional medicine.(46) On 14th June 2003, Dr Rath filed a complaint at the International Criminal Court in The Hague against the pharmaceutical industry. The charges brought were 'genocide' and other 'crimes against humanity', committed in connection with the pharmaceutical industry's business with disease:
The accused willfully and systematically maintain cardiovascular diseases, including high blood pressure, heart failure, diabetic complications and other diseases, cancer, infectious diseases including AIDS, osteoporosis and many other of today's most common diseases that are recognized to be largely preventable by natural means. The accused have deliberately caused the unnecessary suffering and premature death of hundreds of millions of people. The accused systematically and deliberately prevent the eradication of cardiovascular disease, cancer and other diseases by obstructing and blocking the dissemination of life-saving information on the health benefits of natural non-patentable therapies. Thereby, the accused have deliberately caused further unnecessary suffering and the premature death of hundreds of millions of people. The accused deliberately and systematically expand existing diseases and creating new diseases by manufacturing and marketing pharmaceutical drugs with short-term symptomatic relief but with known and detrimental long-term side-effects. Thereby the accused have deliberately caused further unnecessary suffering and premature death of hundreds of millions of people. (47)
In 1996 the U.N. Codex Alimentarius Commission launched a world-wide initiative to restrict access to natural medicines. The Codex has been translated into hard law by the E.U.(48) In August 2005, The European Food Supplements Directive will become law across the E.U. including the U.K.. This will remove over 5000 vitamin formulations from U.K. shops and dramatically cut the dosage of many others. The Herbal Medicines Directive under consideration by the European Parliament will prevent any new herbal formulas ever coming onto the market and remove any herbal product which hasn't had a proven track record in the E.U.. The Pharmaceuticals Directive seeks to expand the scope of the drug classification. In its current wording even food or water can be included as a substance which 'restores, corrects, or modifies physiological functions'.
The banning of over-the-counter natural medicine will create a two tier planetary health system as the E.U. laws are imposed in other countries under World Trade Organization 'harmonization' rules which will include America. Natural Medicines will be available on prescription only for those that can afford to pay for private consultations whilst the state-run health-care systems will continue to prescribe pharmaceuticals to the public. In this way, the elite will blatantly deny most people access to ground-breaking life-extension herbal and vitamin formulations that they themselves will continue to enjoy.
Dr Rath states that 'No sinister dark men stand behind the unethical plans of the 'Codex Alimentarius" commission, but unscrupulous shareholders and investors of the pharmaceutical industry bank on it'. (49) However, the controlling stake in the pharmaceutical industry is held by the same tiny cabal that controls all other major industries. They are committed to planetary de-population as their policy papers show. It is not, therefore, just about making money.
A challenge to the E.U. Food Supplements Directive is currently being mounted in the European Court of Justice by the Alliance for Natural Health (see http://www.alliance-natural-health.org/).
One in three Europeans and one in two Americans will get cancer. Ten million people a year die of cancer worldwide.(50) Despite the trillions of dollars spent on orthodox research and treatment for cancer, the medical establishment is no further forward in finding a cure. The reason is, of course, that the cancer industry is a hugely profitable population control programme which depends upon patented drugs. World Without Cancer: The Story of Vitamin B17, by G. Edward Griffin, was first published in 1974. The foreword to the 1997 edition states that absolutely nothing has changed since then, except the actors in the plot.
The book details the astonishing fraud and cover-up of the effectiveness of vitamin B17 (laetrile), not least by the Rockefellers' Memorial Sloan Kettering Cancer Centre. For five years between 1972 and 1977 the effectiveness of laetrile was tested by Dr Kanematsu Sugiara at MSKCC. On 13 June 1973, he produced a report which strongly indicated its anti-cancer properties. This did not please his employer, who then set about denigrating his findings, saying that no one else could reproduce them. By 1977, the propaganda war was won. However in November 1997, Ralph Moss,the Assistant Director of Public Affairs who wrote the propaganda, did an extraordinary thing. He held his own press conference at which he named the MSKCC officials who had collaborated in the massive laetrile cover-up. He was fired the next day, but the media soon forgot all about it. (51)
Since the FDA banned laetrile in 1971, thousands of Americans have traveled to Mexico and Germany every year to be treated with it. American doctors can have their licences taken away for prescribing it, or even face imprisonment in California due to its 'anti-quack' cancer legislation. In the U.K., it is illegal for anyone other than registered medical practitioners to claim they can cure or treat cancer.(52) Unfortunately it is the Rockefeller/I.G. Farben monopoly treatment of cancer which is quackery: there is no evidence that chemotherapy or radiotherapy increase life expectancy. In fact both are extremely toxic and often lethal treatments which themselves destroy the patient's immune system and cause cancer and death.
Dr. Lorraine Day is an internationally acclaimed orthopedic trauma surgeon and best selling author. She spent 15 years on the faculty of the University of California School of Medicine in San Francisco as Associate Professor and Vice Chairman of the Department of Orthopedics. She was also Chief of Orthopedic Surgery at San Francisco General Hospital and is recognized worldwide as an AIDS expert. Ten years ago, she contracted breast cancer and reached the terminal stage. However she refused orthodox treatment and devised for herself a ten point plan which didn't involve drugs or even vitamin supplements. Knowing that cancer is the consequence of a dysfunctional immune system, poor diet, and lifestyle and environmental factors, she cured herself by addressing these issues. Dr. Day, like many thousands of others, is alive and well today by taking matters into her own hands. She is roundly attacked in the mainstream press for her crusade against the fraud of the cancer industry and the drug industry in general. Pictures of her tumor can be seen at www.drday.com.
14.6 VACCINATION: THE WEAPON OF CHOICE
It seems illogical that self-proclaimed population control advocates would spend billions of dollars on vaccination programmes trying to save the lives of millions of people in the Third World. The grim reality is that they are covertly murdering and sterilizing these poor people under the guise of public health. Launched in 1999, The Global Alliance for Vaccines and Immunization is a partnership of the who's who in population control: The Rockefeller Foundation, the $24 billion Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation, the United Nations Foundation ( a $1 billion endowment by Ted Turner), The World Bank, The World Health Organization and Western governments.(53)
The stated mission of GAVI and the Vaccine Fund, is to ensure that 'all the world's children have equal access to lifesaving vaccines'. Unfortunately, the more malnourished a child is the more likely it is to suffer a severe reaction to immune-suppressing vaccinations, especially when they are given in combination. Even the American Vaccination Adverse Event Reporting Systems (VAERS) set up in 1990, gives some indication of the carnage caused by vaccines. 90% of all adverse reactions go un-reported to VAERS and chronic conditions which emerge months or years later, such as autism, autoimmune diseases, allergies, cancer, and neurodevelopment disorders, are not officially recognized as consequences of vaccinations anyway.(54) The report by United Press International should be read bearing this in mind:
As of the end of last year, the system contained 244,424 total reports of possible reactions to vaccines, including 99,145 emergency room visits, 5,149 life-threatening reactions, 27,925 hospitalizations, 5,775 disabilities, and 5,309 deaths, according to data compiled by Dr. Mark Geier, a vaccine researcher in Silver Spring, Md. The data represents roughly 1 billion doses of vaccines, according to Geier. (55)
An investigative report by Roman Bystrianyk for www.HealthSentinel.com, shows that there is little epidemiological evidence for the contribution of vaccines to the widescale reduction in death rates from infectious diseases.(56) The Vital Statistics of the United States, published by the Bureau of the Census and the U.S. Dept. of Health, contain death rates from infectious diseases. From 1900 to 1963, when the measles vaccine was introduced, death rates from measles had declined from 13.3 per 100,000 to 0.2 per 100,000 - a 98% decrease. From 1900 to 1949, death rates from whooping cough declined from 12.2 per 100,000 to 0.5 per 100,000 - a 96% decrease. From 1900 to 1949, death rates from diphtheria declined from 40.3 per 100,000 to 0.4 per 100,000 - a 99% decrease.
fig. 1: Death rates from infectious diseases in the U.S.
Mortality data in England and Wales provided by the Office of National Statistics in 1997 shows an identical picture. From 1850 to 1968, when the measles vaccine was introduced, death rates from measles had declined from a range of 52.11 to 26.6 per 100,000 to 0.11 per 100,000 - a range of 99.6% to 99.8% decrease. From 1860 to 1955, death rates from whooping cough declined from a range of 43.73 to 60.86 per 100,000 to 0.2 per 100,000 - a 99.5% to 99.7% decrease.
Also note that scarlet fever and typhoid were eliminated in both countries without any vaccination programme.
Public health experts have long recognized these facts. Thomas McKeown was Professor of Social Medicine in the University of Birmingham Medical School between 1950 and 1978. He is still regarded as a major social philosopher of medicine, and known for his important works on epidemiology and the practice and purpose of medicine. His conclusion was that infectious diseases were declining well before widespread vaccination:
The distinguished epidemiologist Thomas McKeown (1912-1988) maintained that reductions in deaths associated with infectious diseases (air-, water-, and food-borne diseases) cannot have been brought about by medical advances, since such diseases were declining long before effective means were available to combat them.
A paper published in the premier medical journal, The Lancet, in January1977 by the Department of Community Medicine, also indicated that vaccinations were not responsible for the decline in mortality:
Vaccination, beginning on small scale in some places around 1948 and on a national scale in 1957, did not affect the rate of decline if it be assumed that one attack usually confers immunity, as in most major communicable diseases of childhood. … The steady decline of whooping cough between 1930 and 1957 is predictive of a linear exponential decay characteristic of a general and progressive lessening in the volume and spread of infection among the susceptible population. With this pattern well established before 1957, there is no evidence that vaccination played a major role in the decline in incidence and mortality in the trend of events
An even a more recent editorial statement from the Journal of Pediatrics in December 1999 declared that proper sanitation was largely responsible for the early large declines in infectious diseases:
...the largest historical decrease in morbidity and mortality caused by infectious disease was experienced not with the modern antibiotic and vaccine era, but after the introduction of clean water and effective sewer systems.
Again, in the August 2001 edition of the American Journal of Infection Control, epidemiologists concluded that,
except for the smallpox vaccination, which was introduced in 1798 and made compulsory in England in 1853, the overall contribution of medical innovations to the health revolution of the 1800s is difficult to validate. Diphtheria, tetanus, and pertussis vaccine arrived on the scene only after disease mortality rates already had been reduced significantly; measles, rubella, and polio vaccines did not become available until the middle of the 20th century
Because they do not trigger a proper immune response, vaccinations give live viruses and other live vaccine contaminants a headstart in the body. Normally microorganisms have to pass through the mucous membranes in the mouth and gastro-intestinal tract which are lined with Immunoglobulin A. Interaction with IgA triggers a cellular immune response which precedes the antibody/humoral response. Injected microorganisms bypass the mucousal /cellular immune system and directly trigger the antibody-producing plasma cells in the bone marrow. This is why vaccine manufactures add immune system stimulating 'adjuvants' such as aluminium, lipopolysacchride and squalene. Live microorganisms also take advantage of significant immune suppression caused by the vaccination itself. Research found that 20% of measles vaccines recipients have chronic measles infections in their brains later in life indicating that live virus vaccines create greater risk of developing the disease.(57) In the New England Journal of Medicine of July 1994, a study found that over 80% of children under 5 years of age who had contracted whooping cough had been fully vaccinated against it. (58)
Dr. Archie Kalokerinos is a Life Fellow of the Royal Society for Health, a Fellow of the International Academy of Preventive Medicine, Fellow of the Australasian College of Biomedical Scientists, Fellow of the Hong Kong Medical Technology Association, and a Member of the New York Academy of Sciences. In 1978 he was awarded the A.M.M.(Australian Medal of Merit) for 'outstanding scientific research'. On the subject of vaccines he comments:
My final conclusion after forty years or more in this business [medicine] is that the unofficial policy of the World Health Organization and the unoffical policy of the 'Save the Children's Fund' and... [other vaccine promoting] organizations is one of murder and genocide... I cannot see any other possible explanation... You cannot immunize sick children, malnourished children, and expect to get away with it. You'll kill far more children than would have died from natural infection."It was similar with the measles vaccination. They went through Africa, South America and elsewhere, and vaccinated sick and starving children... They thought they were wiping out measles, but most of those susceptible to measles died from some other disease that they developed as a result of being vaccinated. The vaccination reduced their immune levels and acted like an infection. Many got septicaemia, gastro-enteritis, etc, or made their nutritional status worse and they died from malnutrition. So there were very few susceptible infants left alive to get measles. It's one way to get good statistics, kill all those that are susceptible, which is what they literally did."(59)
American children receive up to forty vaccinations before the age of two. Dr. H.H. Fudenberg, world-renowned immunologist with hundreds of publications to his credit, made the following comments:
One vaccine decreases cell-mediated immunity by 50%, two vaccines by 70%…all triple vaccines (MMR, DTaP) markedly impair cell-mediated immunity, which predisposes to recurrent viral infections.(60)
Like HIV, the measles virus is particularly immune suppressing hence the danger of the live virus measles vaccine. In 2001, GAVI launched an initiative to vaccinate all 200 million children in sub-Saharan Africa against measles, despite the fact that HIV infection is rampant there.(61)
As well as the dangerous assault on fragile immune systems by the vaccine's active ingredients, there are live contaminants in vaccines. Microorganism contamination, is a relatively common finding in many commercial vaccines. One study in the journal Vaccine in 1986, found that ~6% of commercial vaccines tested were contaminated with a tiny bacteria called mycoplasma. Most U.S.military personnel deployed to the Gulf in 1990 received up to 30 vaccinations in a two to three day period, some probably experimental and administered without proper informed consent. Recent studies by the Institute of Molecular Medicine found that ~40% of veterans with Gulf War Illness were infected with mycoplasma fermentans.(62)100% of Gulf War Illness patients who developed the motor neuron disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, tested positive for systemic mycoplasma infection.(63)
The polio vaccine administered to thirty million Americans during the late fifties and early sixties was contaminated with the monkey virus SV40. This is believed to be responsible for an epidemic of cancers.(64) When SV40 was discovered in rhesus monkey kidney cells during the early 1960s, the manufacturers switched rapidly to cells from African green monkeys. However Dr John Martin, an FDA scientist discovered in 1972 that these cells were also contaminated, this time with a cytomegalovirus. To date his requests to have the vaccine properly tested have gone unanswered by the FDA because the manufacturers can hide behind 'proprietary interests'. Dr Martin now works as an independent researcher studying the role of this 'stealth' virus in whole range of chronic debilitating illnesses. (65)
VACCINES FOR STERILIZATION
The World Health Organization has a twenty year history of developing contraceptive vaccines. These work by creating immunity to the body's own fertility hormone, human chorionic gonadotrophin (HcG).